Search the source libraries

Treatment-related changes in bone mineral density as a surrogate biomarker for fracture risk reduction: meta-regression analyses of individual patient data from multiple randomised controlled trials.

Background: The validation of bone mineral density (BMD) as a surrogate outcome for fracture would allow the size of future randomised controlled osteoporosis registration trials to be reduced. We aimed to determine the association between treatment-related changes in BMD, assessed by dual-energy x-ray absorptiometry, and fracture outcomes, including the proportion of treatment effect explained by BMD changes. Methods: We did a pooled analysis of individual patient data from multiple randomised placebo-controlled clinical trials. We included data from multicentre, randomised, placebo-controlled, double-blind trials of osteoporosis medications that included women and men at increased osteoporotic fracture risk. Using individual patient data for each trial we calculated mean 24-month BMD percent change together with fracture reductions and did a meta-regression of the association between treatment-related differences in BMD changes (percentage difference, active minus placebo) and fracture risk reduction. We also used individual patient data to determine the proportion of anti-fracture treatment effect explained by BMD changes and the BMD change needed in future trials to ensure fracture reduction efficacy. Findings: Individual patient data from 91 779 participants of 23 randomised, placebo-controlled trials were included. The trials had 1-9 years of follow-up and included 12 trials of bisphosphonate, one of odanacatib, two of hormone therapy (one of conjugated equine oestrogen and one of conjugated equine oestrogen plus medroxyprogesterone acetate), three of PTH receptor agonists, one of denosumab, and four of selective oestrogen receptor modulator trials. The meta-regression revealed significant associations between treatment-related changes in hip, femoral neck, and spine BMD and reductions in vertebral (r2 0·73, p<0·0001; 0·59, p=0·0005; 0·61, p=0·0003), hip (0·41, p=0·014; 0·41, p=0·0074; 0·34, p=0·023) and non-vertebral fractures (0·53, p=0·0021; 0·65, p<0·0001; 0·51, p=0·0019). Minimum 24-month percentage changes in total hip BMD providing almost certain fracture reductions in future trials ranged from 1·42% to 3·18%, depending on fracture site. Hip BMD changes explained substantial proportions (44-67%) of treatment-related fracture risk reduction. Interpretation: Treatment-related BMD changes are strongly associated with fracture reductions across randomised trials of osteoporosis therapies with differing mechanisms of action. These analyses support BMD as a surrogate outcome for fracture outcomes in future randomised trials of new osteoporosis therapies and provide an important demonstration of the value of public access to individual patient data from multiple trials. Funding: Foundation for National Institutes of Health.

The lancet. Diabetes & endocrinology · systematic review · 165 citationsread the source →

Life course health consequences and associated annual costs of adverse childhood experiences across Europe and North America: a systematic review and meta-analysis.

Background: An increasing number of studies are identifying associations between adverse childhood experiences (ACEs) and ill health throughout the life course. We aimed to calculate the proportions of major risk factors for and causes of ill health that are attributable to one or multiple types of ACE and the associated financial costs. Methods: In this systematic review and meta-analysis, we searched for studies in which risk data in individuals with ACEs were compared with these data in those without ACEs. We searched six electronic databases (MEDLINE, CINAHL, PsycINFO, Applied Social Sciences Index and Abstracts, Criminal Justice Databases, and the Education Resources Information Center) for quantitative studies published between Jan 1, 1990, and July 11, 2018, that reported risks of health-related behaviours and causes of ill health in adults that were associated with cumulative measures of ACEs (ie, number of ACEs). We included studies in adults in populations that did not have a high risk of ACEs, that had sample sizes of at least 1000 people, and that provided ACE prevalence data. We calculated the pooled RR for risk factors (harmful alcohol use, illicit drug use, smoking, and obesity) and causes of ill health (cancer, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, respiratory disease, anxiety, and depression) associated with ACEs. RRs were used to estimate the population-attributable fractions (PAFs) of risk attributable to ACEs and the disability-adjusted life-years (DALYs) and financial costs associated with ACEs. This study was prospectively registered in PROSPERO (CRD42018090356). Findings: Of 4387 unique articles found following our initial search, after review of the titles (and abstracts, when the title was relevant), we assessed 880 (20%) full-text articles. We considered 221 (25%) full-text articles for inclusion, of which 23 (10%) articles met all selection criteria for our meta-analysis. We found a pooled prevalence of 23·5% of individuals (95% CI 18·7-28·5) with one ACE and 18·7% (14·7-23·2) with two or more ACEs in Europe (from ten studies) and of 23·4% of individuals (22·0-24·8) with one ACE and 35·0% (31·6-38·4) with two or more ACEs in north America (from nine studies). Illicit drug use had the highest PAFs associated with ACEs of all the risk factors assessed in both regions (34·1% in Europe; 41·1% in north America). In both regions, PAFs of causes of ill health were highest for mental illness outcomes: ACEs were attributed to about 30% of cases of anxiety and 40% of cases of depression in north America and more than a quarter of both conditions in Europe. Costs of cardiovascular disease attributable to ACEs were substantially higher than for most other causes of ill health because of higher DALYs for this condition. Total annual costs attributable to ACEs were estimated to be US$581 billion in Europe and $748 billion in north America. More than 75% of these costs arose in individuals with two or more ACEs. Interpretation: Millions of adults across Europe and north America live with a legacy of ACEs. Our findings suggest that a 10% reduction in ACE prevalence could equate to annual savings of 3 million DALYs or $105 billion. Programmes to prevent ACEs and moderate their effects are available. Rebalancing expenditure towards ensuring safe and nurturing childhoods would be economically beneficial and relieve pressures on health-care systems. Funding: World Health Organization Regional Office for Europe.

The Lancet. Public health · meta-analysis · 660 citationsread the source →

Psychological therapies for the management of chronic pain (excluding headache) in adults.

Background: Chronic non-cancer pain, a disabling and distressing condition, is common in adults. It is a global public health problem and economic burden on health and social care systems and on people with chronic pain. Psychological treatments aim to reduce pain, disability and distress. This review updates and extends its previous version, published in 2012. Objectives: To determine the clinical efficacy and safety of psychological interventions for chronic pain in adults (age > 18 years) compared with active controls, or waiting list/treatment as usual (TAU). Search methods: We identified randomised controlled trials (RCTs) of psychological therapies by searching CENTRAL, MEDLINE, Embase and PsycINFO to 16 April 2020. We also examined reference lists and trial registries, and searched for studies citing retrieved trials. Selection criteria: RCTs of psychological treatments compared with active control or TAU of face-to-face therapies for adults with chronic pain. We excluded studies of headache or malignant disease, and those with fewer than 20 participants in any arm at treatment end. Data collection and analysis: Two or more authors rated risk of bias, extracted data, and judged quality of evidence (GRADE). We compared cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT), behavioural therapy (BT), and acceptance and commitment therapy (ACT) with active control or TAU at treatment end, and at six month to 12 month follow-up. We did not analyse the few trials of other psychological treatments. We assessed treatment effectiveness for pain intensity, disability, and distress. We extracted data on adverse events (AEs) associated with treatment. Main results: We added 41 studies (6255 participants) to 34 of the previous review's 42 studies, and now have 75 studies in total (9401 participants at treatment end). Most participants had fibromyalgia, chronic low back pain, rheumatoid arthritis, or mixed chronic pain. Most risk of bias domains were at high or unclear risk of bias, with selective reporting and treatment expectations mostly at unclear risk of bias. AEs were inadequately recorded and/or reported across studies. CBT The largest evidence base was for CBT (59 studies). CBT versus active control showed very small benefit at treatment end for pain (standardised mean difference (SMD) -0.09, 95% confidence interval (CI) -0.17 to -0.01; 3235 participants; 23 studies; moderate-quality evidence), disability (SMD -0.12, 95% CI -0.20 to -0.04; 2543 participants; 19 studies; moderate-quality evidence), and distress (SMD -0.09, 95% CI -0.18 to -0.00; 3297 participants; 24 studies; moderate-quality evidence). We found small benefits for CBT over TAU at treatment end for pain (SMD -0.22, 95% CI -0.33 to -0.10; 2572 participants; 29 studies; moderate-quality evidence), disability (SMD -0.32, 95% CI -0.45 to -0.19; 2524 participants; 28 studies; low-quality evidence), and distress (SMD -0.34, 95% CI -0.44 to -0.24; 2559 participants; 27 studies; moderate-quality evidence). Effects were largely maintained at follow-up for CBT versus TAU, but not for CBT versus active control. Evidence quality for CBT outcomes ranged from moderate to low. We rated evidence for AEs as very low quality for both comparisons. BT We analysed eight studies (647 participants). We found no evidence of difference between BT and active control at treatment end (pain SMD -0.67, 95% CI -2.54 to 1.20, very low-quality evidence; disability SMD -0.65, 95% CI -1.85 to 0.54, very low-quality evidence; or distress SMD -0.73, 95% CI -1.47 to 0.01, very low-quality evidence). At follow-up, effects were similar. We found no evidence of difference between BT and TAU (pain SMD -0.08, 95% CI -0.33 to 0.17, low-quality evidence; disability SMD -0.02, 95% CI -0.24 to 0.19, moderate-quality evidence; distress SMD 0.22, 95% CI -0.10 to 0.54, low-quality evidence) at treatment end. At follow-up, we found one to three studies with no evidence of difference between BT and TAU. We rated evidence for all BT versus active control outcomes as very low quality; for BT versus TAU. Evidence quality ranged from moderate to very low. We rated evidence for AEs as very low quality for BT versus active control. No studies of BT versus TAU reported AEs. ACT We analysed five studies (443 participants). There was no evidence of difference between ACT and active control for pain (SMD -0.54, 95% CI -1.20 to 0.11, very low-quality evidence), disability (SMD -1.51, 95% CI -3.05 to 0.03, very low-quality evidence) or distress (SMD -0.61, 95% CI -1.30 to 0.07, very low-quality evidence) at treatment end. At follow-up, there was no evidence of effect for pain or distress (both very low-quality evidence), but two studies showed a large benefit for reducing disability (SMD -2.56, 95% CI -4.22 to -0.89, very low-quality evidence). Two studies compared ACT to TAU at treatment end. Results should be interpreted with caution. We found large benefits of ACT for pain (SMD -0.83, 95% CI -1.57 to -0.09, very low-quality evidence), but none for disability (SMD -1.39, 95% CI -3.20 to 0.41, very low-quality evidence), or distress (SMD -1.16, 95% CI -2.51 to 0.20, very low-quality evidence). Lack of data precluded analysis at follow-up. We rated evidence quality for AEs to be very low. We encourage caution when interpreting very low-quality evidence because the estimates are uncertain and could be easily overturned. Authors' conclusions: We found sufficient evidence across a large evidence base (59 studies, over 5000 participants) that CBT has small or very small beneficial effects for reducing pain, disability, and distress in chronic pain, but we found insufficient evidence to assess AEs. Quality of evidence for CBT was mostly moderate, except for disability, which we rated as low quality. Further trials may provide more precise estimates of treatment effects, but to inform improvements, research should explore sources of variation in treatment effects. Evidence from trials of BT and ACT was of moderate to very low quality, so we are very uncertain about benefits or lack of benefits of these treatments for adults with chronic pain; other treatments were not analysed. These conclusions are similar to our 2012 review, apart from the separate analysis of ACT.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · meta-analysis · 349 citationsread the source →

The prevalence and risk factors of mental problems in medical students during COVID-19 pandemic: A systematic review and meta-analysis.

Background: This meta-analysis and systematic review aimed to evaluate the global prevalence and risk factors of mental problems (i.e., depression, anxiety, stress, sleep disorder, posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD), burnout, psychological distress, and suicidal ideation) among medical students during the COVID-19 pandemic. Method: We searched PubMed, Embase, Web of Science, psycARTICLES, PsycINFO, CNKI, and Wan Fang for studies on the prevalence of mental problems among medical students from January 1, 2020, to April 1, 2022. The pooled prevalence was calculated by random-effect models. We performed a narrative review to identify the risk factors. Results: The meta-analysis included 201 studies (N = 198,000). The prevalence of depression (41 %, 95 % CI, 37-45 %,), anxiety (38 %,95 % CI, 34 %-42 %), stress (34 %, 95 % CI, 27 %-42 %), sleep disorder (52 %, 95 % CI, 44 %-60 %), psychological distress (58 %, 95 % CI, 51 %-65 %), PTSD (34 %, 95 % CI, 22 %-46 %), suicidal ideation (15 %, 95 % CI, 11 %-18 %) and burnout (38 %, 95 % CI, 25 %-50 %) was high. The major risk factors were being female, being junior or preclinical students, exposure to COVID-19, academic stress, psychiatric or physical disorders history, economic trouble, fear of education impairment, online learning trouble, fear of infection, loneliness, low physical activity, low social support, problematic internet or smartphone use, and young age. Limitations: Most studies were cross-sectional. Few studies provided a reasonable response rate, suggesting potential selection bias. Conclusions: The study demonstrated a high prevalence and risk factors for mental problems during COVID-19, calling for mental health services. Our findings are valuable for college and health authorities to identify high-risk students and provide targeted intervention.

Journal of affective disorders · meta-analysis · 154 citationsread the source →

First trimester preeclampsia screening and prediction.

Preeclampsia is a major cause of maternal and perinatal morbidity and mortality. Early-onset disease requiring preterm delivery is associated with a higher risk of complications in both mothers and babies. Evidence suggests that the administration of low-dose aspirin initiated before 16 weeks' gestation significantly reduces the rate of preterm preeclampsia. Therefore, it is important to identify pregnant women at risk of developing preeclampsia during the first trimester of pregnancy, thus allowing timely therapeutic intervention. Several professional organizations such as the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG) and National Institute for Health and Care Excellence (NICE) have proposed screening for preeclampsia based on maternal risk factors. The approach recommended by ACOG and NICE essentially treats each risk factor as a separate screening test with additive detection rate and screen-positive rate. Evidence has shown that preeclampsia screening based on the NICE and ACOG approach has suboptimal performance, as the NICE recommendation only achieves detection rates of 41% and 34%, with a 10% false-positive rate, for preterm and term preeclampsia, respectively. Screening based on the 2013 ACOG recommendation can only achieve detection rates of 5% and 2% for preterm and term preeclampsia, respectively, with a 0.2% false-positive rate. Various first trimester prediction models have been developed. Most of them have not undergone or failed external validation. However, it is worthy of note that the Fetal Medicine Foundation (FMF) first trimester prediction model (namely the triple test), which consists of a combination of maternal factors and measurements of mean arterial pressure, uterine artery pulsatility index, and serum placental growth factor, has undergone successful internal and external validation. The FMF triple test has detection rates of 90% and 75% for the prediction of early and preterm preeclampsia, respectively, with a 10% false-positive rate. Such performance of screening is superior to that of the traditional method by maternal risk factors alone. The use of the FMF prediction model, followed by the administration of low-dose aspirin, has been shown to reduce the rate of preterm preeclampsia by 62%. The number needed to screen to prevent 1 case of preterm preeclampsia by the FMF triple test is 250. The key to maintaining optimal screening performance is to establish standardized protocols for biomarker measurements and regular biomarker quality assessment, as inaccurate measurement can affect screening performance. Tools frequently used to assess quality control include the cumulative sum and target plot. Cumulative sum is a sensitive method to detect small shifts over time, and point of shift can be easily identified. Target plot is a tool to evaluate deviation from the expected multiple of median and the expected median of standard deviation. Target plot is easy to interpret and visualize. However, it is insensitive to detecting small deviations. Adherence to well-defined protocols for the measurements of mean arterial pressure, uterine artery pulsatility index, and placental growth factor is required. This article summarizes the existing literature on the different methods, recommendations by professional organizations, quality assessment of different components of risk assessment, and clinical implementation of the first trimester screening for preeclampsia.

American journal of obstetrics and gynecology · review · 212 citationsread the source →

Psychiatric and neuropsychiatric presentations associated with severe coronavirus infections: a systematic review and meta-analysis with comparison to the COVID-19 pandemic.

Background: Before the COVID-19 pandemic, coronaviruses caused two noteworthy outbreaks: severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS), starting in 2002, and Middle East respiratory syndrome (MERS), starting in 2012. We aimed to assess the psychiatric and neuropsychiatric presentations of SARS, MERS, and COVID-19. Methods: In this systematic review and meta-analysis, MEDLINE, Embase, PsycINFO, and the Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature databases (from their inception until March 18, 2020), and medRxiv, bioRxiv, and PsyArXiv (between Jan 1, 2020, and April 10, 2020) were searched by two independent researchers for all English-language studies or preprints reporting data on the psychiatric and neuropsychiatric presentations of individuals with suspected or laboratory-confirmed coronavirus infection (SARS coronavirus, MERS coronavirus, or SARS coronavirus 2). We excluded studies limited to neurological complications without specified neuropsychiatric presentations and those investigating the indirect effects of coronavirus infections on the mental health of people who are not infected, such as those mediated through physical distancing measures such as self-isolation or quarantine. Outcomes were psychiatric signs or symptoms; symptom severity; diagnoses based on ICD-10, DSM-IV, or the Chinese Classification of Mental Disorders (third edition) or psychometric scales; quality of life; and employment. Both the systematic review and the meta-analysis stratified outcomes across illness stages (acute vs post-illness) for SARS and MERS. We used a random-effects model for the meta-analysis, and the meta-analytical effect size was prevalence for relevant outcomes, I2 statistics, and assessment of study quality. Findings: 1963 studies and 87 preprints were identified by the systematic search, of which 65 peer-reviewed studies and seven preprints met inclusion criteria. The number of coronavirus cases of the included studies was 3559, ranging from 1 to 997, and the mean age of participants in studies ranged from 12·2 years (SD 4·1) to 68·0 years (single case report). Studies were from China, Hong Kong, South Korea, Canada, Saudi Arabia, France, Japan, Singapore, the UK, and the USA. Follow-up time for the post-illness studies varied between 60 days and 12 years. The systematic review revealed that during the acute illness, common symptoms among patients admitted to hospital for SARS or MERS included confusion (36 [27·9%; 95% CI 20·5-36·0] of 129 patients), depressed mood (42 [32·6%; 24·7-40·9] of 129), anxiety (46 [35·7%; 27·6-44·2] of 129), impaired memory (44 [34·1%; 26·2-42·5] of 129), and insomnia (54 [41·9%; 22·5-50·5] of 129). Steroid-induced mania and psychosis were reported in 13 (0·7%) of 1744 patients with SARS in the acute stage in one study. In the post-illness stage, depressed mood (35 [10·5%; 95% CI 7·5-14·1] of 332 patients), insomnia (34 [12·1%; 8·6-16·3] of 280), anxiety (21 [12·3%; 7·7-17·7] of 171), irritability (28 [12·8%; 8·7-17·6] of 218), memory impairment (44 [18·9%; 14·1-24·2] of 233), fatigue (61 [19·3%; 15·1-23·9] of 316), and in one study traumatic memories (55 [30·4%; 23·9-37·3] of 181) and sleep disorder (14 [100·0%; 88·0-100·0] of 14) were frequently reported. The meta-analysis indicated that in the post-illness stage the point prevalence of post-traumatic stress disorder was 32·2% (95% CI 23·7-42·0; 121 of 402 cases from four studies), that of depression was 14·9% (12·1-18·2; 77 of 517 cases from five studies), and that of anxiety disorders was 14·8% (11·1-19·4; 42 of 284 cases from three studies). 446 (76·9%; 95% CI 68·1-84·6) of 580 patients from six studies had returned to work at a mean follow-up time of 35·3 months (SD 40·1). When data for patients with COVID-19 were examined (including preprint data), there was evidence for delirium (confusion in 26 [65%] of 40 intensive care unit patients and agitation in 40 [69%] of 58 intensive care unit patients in one study, and altered consciousness in 17 [21%] of 82 patients who subsequently died in another study). At discharge, 15 (33%) of 45 patients with COVID-19 who were assessed had a dysexecutive syndrome in one study. At the time of writing, there were two reports of hypoxic encephalopathy and one report of encephalitis. 68 (94%) of the 72 studies were of either low or medium quality. Interpretation: If infection with SARS-CoV-2 follows a similar course to that with SARS-CoV or MERS-CoV, most patients should recover without experiencing mental illness. SARS-CoV-2 might cause delirium in a significant proportion of patients in the acute stage. Clinicians should be aware of the possibility of depression, anxiety, fatigue, post-traumatic stress disorder, and rarer neuropsychiatric syndromes in the longer term. Funding: Wellcome Trust, UK National Institute for Health Research (NIHR), UK Medical Research Council, NIHR Biomedical Research Centre at University College London Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust and University College London.

The lancet. Psychiatry · meta-analysis · 1531 citationsread the source →

Psychological and Psychosomatic Symptoms of Second Victims of Adverse Events: a Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis.

Objectives: Despite growing interest in the second-victim phenomenon and greater awareness of its consequences, there has not been a meta-analysis quantifying the negative impact of adverse events on providers involved in adverse events. This study systematically reviewed the types and prevalence of psychological and psychosomatic symptoms among second victims. Methods: We conducted a systematic review of nine electronic databases up to February 2017, without restrictions to publication date or language, examining also additional sources (e.g., gray literature, volumes of journals). Two reviewers performed the search, selection process, quality assessment, data extraction, and synthesis. We resolved disagreements by consensus and/or involving a third reviewer. Quantitative studies on the prevalence of psychological and psychosomatic symptoms of second victims were eligible for inclusion. We used random effects modeling to calculate the overall prevalence rates and the I statistic. Results: Of 7210 records retrieved, 98 potentially relevant studies were identified. Full-text evaluation led to a final selection of 18 studies, based on the reports of 11,649 healthcare providers involved in adverse events. The most prevalent symptoms were troubling memories (81%, 95% confidence interval [CI] = 46-95), anxiety/concern (76%, 95% CI = 33-95), anger toward themselves (75%, 95% CI = 59-86), regret/remorse (72%, 95% CI = 62-81), distress (70%, 95% CI = 60-79), fear of future errors (56%, 95% CI = 34-75), embarrassment (52%, 95% CI = 31-72), guilt (51%, 95% CI = 41-62), and sleeping difficulties (35%, 95% CI = 22-51). Conclusions: Second victims report a high prevalence and wide range of psychological symptoms. More than two-thirds of providers reported troubling memories, anxiety, anger, remorse, and distress. Preventive and therapeutic programs should aim to decrease second victims' emotional distress.

Journal of patient safety · meta-analysis · 134 citationsread the source →

Annual Research Review: Umbrella synthesis of meta-analyses on child maltreatment antecedents and interventions: differential susceptibility perspective on risk and resilience.

Child maltreatment in the family context is a prevalent and pervasive phenomenon in many modern societies. The global perpetration of child abuse and neglect stands in stark contrast to its almost universal condemnation as exemplified in the United Nation's Convention on the Rights of the Child. Much work has been devoted to the task of prevention, yet a grand synthesis of the literature is missing. Focusing on two core elements of prevention, that is, antecedents for maltreatment and the effectiveness of (preventative) interventions, we performed an umbrella review of meta-analyses published between January 1, 2014, and December 17, 2018. Meta-analyses were systematically collected, assessed, and integrated following a uniform approach to allow their comparison across domains. From this analysis of thousands of studies including almost 1.5 million participants, the following risk factors were derived: parental experience of maltreatment in his or her own childhood (d = .47), low socioeconomic status of the family (d = .34), dependent and aggressive parental personality (d = .45), intimate partner violence (d = .41), and higher baseline autonomic nervous system activity (d = .24). The effect size for autonomic stress reactivity was not significant (d = -.10). The umbrella review of interventions to prevent or reduce child maltreatment showed modest intervention effectiveness (d = .23 for interventions targeting child abuse potential or families with self-reported maltreatment and d = .27 for officially reported child maltreatment cases). Despite numerous studies on child maltreatment, some large gaps in our knowledge of antecedents exist. Neurobiological antecedents should receive more research investment. Differential susceptibility theory may shed more light on questions aimed at breaking the intergenerational transmission of maltreatment and on the modest (preventive) intervention effects. In combination with family-based interaction-focused interventions, large-scale socioeconomic experiments such as cash transfer trials and experiments with vouchers to move to a lower-poverty area might be tested to prevent or reduce child maltreatment. Prevalence, antecedents, and preventive interventions of prenatal maltreatment deserve continuing scientific, clinical, and policy attention.

Journal of child psychology and psychiatry, and allied disciplines · systematic review · 137 citationsread the source →

Evaluation of Parental Dental Fear and Anxiety (DFA) on Adolescent Dental Treatment

INTRODUCTION Dental anxiety is a negative state of mind of a dental patient, which is shown to be excessive and unreasonable.[1] Dental fear is a normal emotional response to particularly alarming stimuli in situations related to dental treatment.[1] Dental fear and anxiety (DFA) are often used together to describe different types of fear experienced in the dental environment.[2] American Academy of Pediatrics divides adolescents into three age groups: early 11–14 years, middle 15–17 years, and late 18–21 years.[3] Five specific pathways for DFA were seen in adolescent dental patients. One of which being the parental pathway plays an important role in the transmission of fear hindering their child’s dental treatment.[4] Parental DFA is usually an excessive perturbing of the things that could go wrong in child’s oral health and is an important factor that has an impact on adolescents receiving dental treatment and maintenance of their oral health. It is necessary to recognize and know how parental DFA affects the dental treatment of adolescents. Thus, this review aimed at evaluating the parental influence of DFA on dental treatment of adolescents. MATERIALS AND METHODS DATA EXTRACTION AND LITERATURE SEARCH STRATEGY A broad search of literature published between 2005 and 2021 from electronic databases through Scopus, PubMed, Google Scholar, and Web of Science was performed. These studies were conducted in different countries as mentioned in Table 1. This review article includes eight cross-sectional studies, three longitudinal studies, and one descriptive study. The age group of children included ranged from 10 to 19 years. Table 1: Summary study design, data collection, dental fear and anxiety assessment scales used analysis, and interpretation of reviewed articlesThe search was carried out using the following keywords: dental anxiety, parental dental anxiety, adolescent, and dental treatment. The terms used to formulate the search strategies were parent OR mother OR father AND dental fear OR dental anxiety AND adolescent AND dental treatment. Data extracted were independently reviewed and disagreements were solved by discussion. A flowchart representing the method of article selection for the review is shown in Figure 1.Figure 1: Flowchart representing the method of article selectionINCLUSION CRITERIA We included the studies in which parental dental anxiety was a major criterion affecting different dental health conditions. Articles referring to adolescents (10–19 years) facing different oral health problems were also included in the study. EXCLUSION CRITERIA Abstracts that were not giving relevant data, data from unpublished articles, parental dental anxiety in medically compromised and specially challenged adolescents, and articles that did not include the adolescent age group were excluded from the study. RESULTS Approximately 83 publications were found related. Screening identified 10 articles that fulfilled the criteria of inclusion; full-text versions were retrieved and their references were screened for further relevant articles. Checking the subreference list, another two relevant articles were found. Thus, 12 articles were considered for this review that met the final inclusion criteria. Of 12 articles reviewed, 8 studies[56789101112] used validated assessment scales as mentioned by authors for measuring parental DFA. The authors have not specified the validation of assessment scales used for the other four studies.[13141516] The various DFA assessment scales used in the reviewed articles are mentioned in Table 2. Summary study design, data collection, analysis, and interpretation of reviewed articles are mentioned in Table 1.Table 2: Tabular representation of dental fear and anxiety assessment scales usedDISCUSSION Dental anxiety being primarily a negative parental factor was found to affect children from assessing regular dental care. Among the reviewed articles based on the outcome, we found that three articles explained about a relationship between parental DFA and adolescent dental treatment,[67,13] and the remaining nine articles explained about the correlation between parental DFA scores with adolescent DFA scores.[6891011,13141516] No significant association was observed between parental DFA and adolescent DFA scores in two of the studies,[78] whereas two studies showed positive association only during early adolescence.[914] Other five studies showed a significant positive correlation of parental DFA with their children’s dental anxiety,[10111215,16] of which three studies also suggested fathers as mediating role in transmission of DFA to their children.[1011,15] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PARENTAL DENTAL FEAR AND ANXIETY AND ADOLESCENT DENTAL TREATMENT Adolescent dental treatment utilization mainly depends on parental/caretaker’s decision-making and their dental care obtaining habits. In childhood and even adolescence, this becomes very crucial for the development of good oral health behavior like regular visits to the dentist and preventive dental care.[17] Another postulated process is “social learning” wherein, media, friends, and relatives portray dentists in negative light or image leading to formation of DFA. These processes of information transmission and vicarious experience lead to negative portrayal of dentists and pessimistic expectations about the dentist’s role. All these predispose to DFA.[18] The absence of anxiety among parents would have a positive influence on a child.[19] Parental dental anxiety along with family income, economic stability, parental oral health literacy, and oral health practices is found to be a few factors that affect adolescent’s oral health-related quality of life (QOL).[202122] Dental anxiety being primarily a negative parental factor was found to affect children from accessing regular dental care, whereas parental self-dental utilization being a positive parental factor showed a positive impact on a child’s dental utilization.[23] Parents with higher anxiety levels were found to start brushing their children’s teeth at an earlier age; hence, a significant correlation was found between parent’s anxiety levels and the age at which the child starts to brush.[24] Dental health status of children was found to be better with more a positive attitude of parents toward dentistry.[25] Among the articles reviewed, two articles were found to have parental DFA during fixed orthodontic treatment of the adolescents which included the use of extraoral appliances. These two studies used different anxiety measurement scales for assessing parental DFA before and during the treatment procedures.[513] Poorer QOL is seen in families of adolescents with malocclusion as compared with the families of adolescents without any occlusal variation; the impact may have effects on parental or guardian’s emotions.[26] Both of the studies assessed state and trait dental anxiety of parents (STAI scale). State anxiety is transient, fluctuates, and varies in intensity. Trait anxiety is a personality trait; it is stable with time.[2728] The result showed that parent’s trait anxiety levels did not change during orthodontic treatment.[513] State anxiety was found to be within normal range and changed according to intensity of pressure.[13] There was an incidence of high levels of state anxiety and depression in both parents and patients under treatment with extra oral orthodontic appliances after 1 year of active treatment. Among patients waiting for orthodontic treatment and among their parents no statistically significant differences were noted in their trait anxiety levels.[5] The extra oral appliances had a negative effect on patient’s and parent’s anxiety levels which might indirectly affect the ongoing dental treatment. It was therefore recommended for clinicians to have alternate treatment modalities in mind to address this challenge.[5] Apart from orthodontic treatment, adolescents are also found commonly with traumatic dental injuries (TDIs) involving dentine/pulp or fracture of the root. A family’s QOL in such conditions was assessed using the family impact scale (FIS). This scale had four subscales, in which parental emotion was one of the subscales assessed. Parental emotion had a significant negative impact on the severity of TDI and severe untreated TDI of an adolescent can be a source of family distress.[629,30] EVIDENCE OF ASSOCIATION OF DENTAL FEAR AND ANXIETY BETWEEN PARENTS AND THEIR ADOLESCENTS Previous studies have shown that parents exhibit an influence on their children’s DFA through modeling and information.[31] The DFA experienced in childhood may lead into adulthood causing a predictor for dental treatment avoidance in adulthood.[3233] Among the reviewed articles, we found a correlation between the parental dental DFA scores with their adolescent’s DFA scores. Parent’s DFA and children’s DFA were assessed using the same dental anxiety measuring scale in nine of the studies,[6891011,13141516] and three studies[57,12] used different scales to measure anxiety levels in parents and children’s. Two of the studies showed no significant association between the anxiety level of adolescents and that of their parents.[78] One of the studies suggested that when a child reached adolescence, parental DFA does not directly contribute to child DFA. Other factors such as the presence of a sibling and family structure (single-parent family, nuclear) are found to play a significant role.[7] Lending support to the former findings, there was no relation between anxiety levels of adolescents (12–17 years) and that of their parents, whereas in the same study a positive association was found when the child is 8–11 years of age.[8] Two studies suggested a positive association in early adolescence.[914] In one of these two studies, mother’s and adolescents dental fear scores had a significant association at the age of 12 years and 18 years in given treatment scenarios such as “feeling about having their teeth scraped and polished, having teeth drilled and having an injection in gum,” whereas there was no significant association between dental fear scores of mother’s and adolescence at 15 years of age.[9] In another study reviewed, in early adolescence (11–12 years), there was a statistically significant association between parental and adolescent dental fear but in mid-adolescence (15–16 years) there was only an association with parental dental fear with their daughters.[14] It was found in the Finnish population, by eliminating dental fear among 30 years and elderly population, 41% of irregular attendees could become regular attenders.[34] In contrast, other five studies showed a significant positive correlation of parental DFA with their children’s dental anxiety.[10111215,16] Fearful parents of adolescents of age (11–16 years) assumed that their child had fear irrespective of whether the child had fear or not.[16] Three of these studies, where parental DFA was assessed in both the parents, suggested that the father also has a mediating role in the transmission of DFA to the children of age group 11–17 years,[10] 7–15 years,[11] and 7–12 years,[15] respectively. Father’s DFA is one of the best predictors of adolescence DFA[1035] and it is also found that child’s dental anxiety is best predicted by the parent’s fear of pain.[12] Previous studies have suggested that children experience fear and anxiety in their early life due to a lack of cognitive ability without having a clear perception of fearful situation and have been influenced by their parent’s fear and anxiety.[36] It is still unclear of the association of DFA between parents and late adolescents.[9] It was found that limited studies were found in the area of adolescent oral health. In the available literature, definite assessment methods were not used to assess the anxiety levels among parents. Furthermore, studies focused on late adolescence are indicated to establish the changes in oral health due to parental DFA. Adolescence is the transitional phase between childhood and adulthood and is a crucial period where they develop decision-making and independence; this has an impact on dental treatment-seeking behavior. The influence of parental dental anxiety might worsen the scenario. Parental DFA is seen to have a direct impact on the treatment itself.[56,20] Previously reviewed articles show a strong association of parental DFA and child’s DFA below 8 years of age.[37] In this study, we found parental DFA showed a positive association with their adolescent’s DFA, which thus hinders their dental treatment. There is a need to give attention to psychological parameters before and during the treatment of both parents and adolescents. Therefore, identifying parental dental anxiety prior to the treatment and intervention helps to reduce or eliminate DFA in children and further improves their dental treatment utilization. This study adds value in sensitizing dental professionals toward addressing parental concerns while treating adolescents and recommendations for appropriate implementations in teaching curricula and policies regarding the same. There is more potential to understand the background of parental DFA in single parents and in mother and father alone and also the factors that made them vulnerable. Parental education/counselling regarding various dental treatment procedures using appropriate methods such as focus group discussion will help to reduce DFA among the parental populations. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT We thank Health Sciences Library, Manipal Manipal Academy of Higher Education, Manipal, Udupi, Karnataka, India and Department of Psychiatry, Kasturba Medical College and Hospital, Manipal, Manipal Academy of Higher Education, Manipal, Udupi, Karnataka, India. FINANCIAL SUPPORT AND SPONSORSHIP This study was self-funded. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST There are no conflicts of interest. AUTHORS CONTRIBUTIONS Idea and conceptualization: Ramprasad Vasthare. Literature search: Thrisha Hegde, Bhavyashri P. Manuscript writing: Thrisha Hegde, Bhavyashri P, Ramprasad Vasthare, Karthik M, Ravindra Munoli. Editing of the review: Ramprasad Vasthare, Thrisha Hegde, Bhavyashri P, Karthik M, Ravindra Munoli. Intellectual inputs: Ramprasad Vasthare, Ravindra Munoli, Karthik M. ETHICAL POLICY AND INSTITUTIONAL REVIEW BOARD STATEMENT Not applicable as this was a narrative review. PATIENT DECLARATION OF CONSENT Not applicable. DATA AVAILABILITY STATEMENT Data of literature search is available on appropriate request to the corresponding author.

Journal of International Society of Preventive and Community Dentistry · review · 16 citationsread the source →

Digital Health Technologies for Maternal and Child Health in Africa and Other Low- and Middle-Income Countries: Cross-disciplinary Scoping Review With Stakeholder Consultation.

Background: Maternal and child health (MCH) is a global health concern, especially impacting low- and middle-income countries (LMIC). Digital health technologies are creating opportunities to address the social determinants of MCH by facilitating access to information and providing other forms of support throughout the maternity journey. Previous reviews in different disciplines have synthesized digital health intervention outcomes in LMIC. However, contributions in this space are scattered across publications in different disciplines and lack coherence in what digital MCH means across fields. Objective: This cross-disciplinary scoping review synthesized the existing published literature in 3 major disciplines on the use of digital health interventions for MCH in LMIC, with a particular focus on sub-Saharan Africa. Methods: We conducted a scoping review using the 6-stage framework by Arksey and O'Malley across 3 disciplines, including public health, social sciences applied to health, and human-computer interaction research in health care. We searched the following databases: Scopus, PubMed, Google Scholar, ACM Digital Library, IEEE Xplore, Web of Science, and PLOS. A stakeholder consultation was undertaken to inform and validate the review. Results: During the search, 284 peer-reviewed articles were identified. After removing 41 duplicates, 141 articles met our inclusion criteria: 34 from social sciences applied to health, 58 from public health, and 49 from human-computer interaction research in health care. These articles were then tagged (labeled) by 3 researchers using a custom data extraction framework to obtain the findings. First, the scope of digital MCH was found to target health education (eg, breastfeeding and child nutrition), care and follow-up of health service use (to support community health workers), maternal mental health, and nutritional and health outcomes. These interventions included mobile apps, SMS text messaging, voice messaging, web-based applications, social media, movies and videos, and wearable or sensor-based devices. Second, we highlight key challenges: little attention has been given to understanding the lived experiences of the communities; key role players (eg, fathers, grandparents, and other family members) are often excluded; and many studies are designed considering nuclear families that do not represent the family structures of the local cultures. Conclusions: Digital MCH has shown steady growth in Africa and other LMIC settings. Unfortunately, the role of the community was negligible, as these interventions often do not include communities early and inclusively enough in the design process. We highlight key opportunities and sociotechnical challenges for digital MCH in LMIC, such as more affordable mobile data; better access to smartphones and wearable technologies; and the rise of custom-developed, culturally appropriate apps that are more suited to low-literacy users. We also focus on barriers such as an overreliance on text-based communications and the difficulty of MCH research and design to inform and translate into policy.

Journal of medical Internet research · review · 40 citationsread the source →

Artificial Intelligence and Radiologist Burnout.

Importance: Understanding the association of artificial intelligence (AI) with physician burnout is crucial for fostering a collaborative interactive environment between physicians and AI. Objective: To estimate the association between AI use in radiology and radiologist burnout. Design, setting, and participants: This cross-sectional study conducted a questionnaire survey between May and October 2023, using the national quality control system of radiology in China. Participants included radiologists from 1143 hospitals. Radiologists reporting regular or consistent AI use were categorized as the AI group. Statistical analysis was performed from October 2023 to May 2024. Exposure: AI use in radiology practice. Main outcomes and measures: Burnout was defined by emotional exhaustion (EE) or depersonalization according to the Maslach Burnout Inventory. Workload was assessed based on working hours, number of image interpretations, hospital level, device type, and role in the workflow. AI acceptance was determined via latent class analysis considering AI-related knowledge, attitude, confidence, and intention. Propensity score-based mixed-effect generalized linear logistic regression was used to estimate the associations between AI use and burnout and its components. Interactions of AI use, workload, and AI acceptance were assessed on additive and multiplicative scales. Results: Among 6726 radiologists included in this study, 2376 (35.3%) were female and 4350 (64.7%) were male; the median (IQR) age was 41 (34-48) years; 3017 were in the AI group (1134 [37.6%] female; median [IQR] age, 40 [33-47] years) and 3709 in the non-AI group (1242 [33.5%] female; median [IQR] age, 42 [34-49] years). The weighted prevalence of burnout was significantly higher in the AI group compared with the non-AI group (40.9% vs 38.6%; P < .001). After adjusting for covariates, AI use was significantly associated with increased odds of burnout (odds ratio [OR], 1.20; 95% CI, 1.10-1.30), primarily driven by its association with EE (OR, 1.21; 95% CI, 1.10-1.34). A dose-response association was observed between the frequency of AI use and burnout (P for trend < .001). The associations were more pronounced among radiologists with high workload and lower AI acceptance. A significant negative interaction was noted between high AI acceptance and AI use. Conclusions and relevance: In this cross-sectional study of radiologist burnout, frequent AI use was associated with an increased risk of radiologist burnout, particularly among those with high workload or lower AI acceptance. Further longitudinal studies are needed to provide more evidence.

JAMA network open · 41 citationsread the source →

Relationships between types of father breastfeeding support and breastfeeding outcomes.

Fathers' support can influence mothers' breastfeeding decisions and behavior. Potentially supportive behaviors have been reported in previous studies, but no studies have directly examined which, if any, of those actions are actually more likely to result in desired breastfeeding outcomes. The two studies reported in this paper address this gap by examining relationships between fathers' reported breastfeeding support and mothers' perceptions of received support and breastfeeding intentions, satisfaction, and duration. The Partner Breastfeeding Influence Scale (PBIS) was used in an online survey with 64 women and 41 men (34 couples) and a telephone survey with 80 mothers and 65 fathers (63 couples). Fathers' and mothers' reports of how often fathers engage in the types of support measured by the PBIS were used to predict breastfeeding intentions, satisfaction, and duration. In Study 1, responsiveness predicted breastfeeding success and satisfaction for men and satisfaction for women. However, mothers' intended breastfeeding duration was shorter when fathers both wanted them to breastfeed for a long time and were more appreciative and savvy about breastfeeding. In Study 2, when fathers reported being more appreciative and directly involved in breastfeeding, mothers reported shorter breastfeeding duration. In both studies, mothers' perceptions of their partners' responsiveness and fathers' reports of their own responsiveness predicted longer breastfeeding intentions and duration. These findings suggest that the most effective breastfeeding support is delivered using a sensitive, coordinated teamwork approach that is responsive to the mother's needs.

Maternal & child nutrition · 106 citationsread the source →

Psychometric properties of the Satisfaction with Life Scale (SWLS), derived from a large German community sample.

Purpose: The aim of this study was to test psychometric properties of the Satisfaction with Life Scale (SWLS), to provide normative values, and to analyze associations between life satisfaction and sociodemographic and behavioral data. Methods: A German community sample (n = 9711) with an age range of 18-80 years was surveyed using the SWLS and several other questionnaires. Confirmatory factor analysis (CFA) was used to test the dimensionality of the SWLS. Invariance across gender and age groups was tested with multiple-group CFA. Associations between SWLS, sociodemographic variables, and behavioral variables were tested with ANOVAs. Results: Confirmatory factorial analysis results confirmed that the SWLS is a one-dimensional scale. Measurement invariance across gender was completely confirmed, while concerning age strict measurement invariance was confirmed. The effects of gender and age on satisfaction with life were weak. Satisfaction with life was associated with fatigue (r = - .49), the mental component of quality of life (r = .45), anxiety (r = - .42), dispositional optimism (r = .41), pessimism (r = - .34), sleep quality (r = - .32), and sociodemographic factors such as marital status, income, and occupational status. Non-smokers reported higher life satisfaction than smokers. Conclusions: Because of the good psychometric properties, the SWLS can be recommended for use in epidemiological research. Normative values based on a large community sample are provided.

Quality of life research : an international journal of quality of life aspects of treatment, care and rehabilitation · 44 citationsread the source →

Memantine for patients with Parkinson's disease dementia or dementia with Lewy bodies: a randomised, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial.

Background: Previous studies have suggested that patients with Lewy-body-related dementias might benefit from treatment with the N-methyl D-aspartate receptor antagonist memantine, but further data are needed. Therefore, the efficacy and safety of memantine were investigated in patients with mild to moderate Parkinson's disease dementia (PDD) or dementia with Lewy bodies (DLB). Methods: Patients (≥50 years of age) with mild to moderate PDD or DLB were recruited from 30 specialist centres in Austria, France, Germany, the UK, Greece, Italy, Spain, and Turkey. They were randomly assigned to placebo or memantine (20 mg per day) according to a computer-generated list. Patients and all physicians who had contact with them were masked to treatment assignment. No primary endpoint was defined. Safety analyses were done for all patients who took at least one dose of memantine or placebo, and efficacy analyses were done for all patients who had at least one valid postbaseline assessment. This trial is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT00855686. Findings: Of the 199 patients randomly assigned to treatment, 34 with DLB and 62 with PDD were given memantine, and 41 with DLB and 58 with PDD were given placebo. 159 (80%) patients completed the study: 80 in the memantine group and 79 in the placebo group. 93 patients treated with memantine and 97 patients treated with placebo were included in the efficacy analysis. At week 24, patients with DLB who received memantine showed greater improvement according to Alzheimer's disease cooperative study (ADCS)-clinical global impression of change scores than did those who received placebo (mean change from baseline 3·3 vs 3·9, respectively, difference -0·6 [95% CI -1·2 to -0·1]; p=0·023). No significant differences were noted between the two treatments in patients with PDD (3·6 with memantine vs 3·8 with placebo, -0·1 [-0·6 to 0·3]; p=0·576) or in the total population (3·5 with memantine vs 3·8 with placebo, -0·3 [-0·7 to 0·1]; p=0·120). Neuropsychiatric-inventory scores showed significantly greater improvement in the memantine group than in the placebo group (-4·3 vs 1·7, respectively, -5·9 [-11·6 to -0·2]; p=0·041) in patients with DLB, but not in those with PDD (-1·6 vs -0·1, respectively, -1·4 [-5·9 to 3·0]; p=0·522) or in the total patient population (-2·6 vs 0·4, respectively, -2·9 [-6·3 to 0·5]; p=0·092). In most of the cognitive test scores, ADCS-activities of daily living, and Zarit caregiver burden scores, there were no significant differences between the two treatment groups in any of the study populations. The incidence of adverse events and number of discontinuations due to adverse events were similar in the two groups. The most common serious adverse events were stroke (n=3 in memantine group), falls (n=2 in memantine group; n=1 in placebo group), and worsening of dementia (n=2 in memantine group). Interpretation: Memantine seems to improve global clinical status and behavioural symptoms of patients with mild to moderate DLB, and might be an option for treatment of these patients. Funding: Lundbeck.

The Lancet. Neurology · randomised controlled trial · 262 citationsread the source →

The relevance of cognitive emotion regulation to psychotic symptoms - A systematic review and meta-analysis.

Numerous studies emphasise the pivotal role of negative affect in the formation and maintenance of positive symptoms, which moves emotion regulation (ER) as a contributing factor into focus. We systematically reviewed and meta-analysed case-control studies reporting cross-sectional, correlative and experimental data of ER strategies in patients with psychotic disorders. In total, 42 studies were eligible, providing data for 2498 subjects and 3381 healthy controls. Questionnaire-based cross-sectional data (k=39) indicated strongest effects for rumination (g=-0,67 [-0,85 to -0,48]), self-blaming (g=-0,56; [-0,76 to -0,37]) and distraction (g=0,55 [0,11 to 0,98]). Suppression was more frequently (g=-0,36 [-0,56 to -0,16]) and cognitive reappraisal less frequently used (g=0,41 [0,28 to 0,55]), but heterogeneity was high. Correlative data (k=6) supported the assumption of an association between maladaptive strategies and positive symptoms (r=0,34 [0,22 to 0,44]). Less evidence of group differences was found in the experimental studies (k=3). The findings support the notion that ER is markedly impaired in patients with psychotic disorders. However, future research will need to further clarify the extent to which difficulties continue to exist after controlling for context and emotion intensity. The large effects for rumination and self-blaming point to promising treatment targets but also raise questions concerning the specifity of findings.

Clinical psychology review · meta-analysis · 81 citationsread the source →

Omega-3 fatty acid addition during pregnancy.

Background: Higher intakes of foods containing omega-3 long-chain polyunsaturated fatty acids (LCPUFA), such as fish, during pregnancy have been associated with longer gestations and improved perinatal outcomes. This is an update of a review that was first published in 2006. Objectives: To assess the effects of omega-3 LCPUFA, as supplements or as dietary additions, during pregnancy on maternal, perinatal, and neonatal outcomes and longer-term outcomes for mother and child. Search methods: For this update, we searched Cochrane Pregnancy and Childbirth's Trials Register, ClinicalTrials.gov, the WHO International Clinical Trials Registry Platform (ICTRP) (16 August 2018), and reference lists of retrieved studies. Selection criteria: Randomised controlled trials (RCTs) comparing omega-3 fatty acids (as supplements or as foods, stand-alone interventions, or with a co-intervention) during pregnancy with placebo or no omega-3, and studies or study arms directly comparing omega-3 LCPUFA doses or types. Trials published in abstract form were eligible for inclusion. Data collection and analysis: Two review authors independently assessed study eligibility, extracted data, assessed risk of bias in trials and assessed quality of evidence for prespecified birth/infant, maternal, child/adult and health service outcomes using the GRADE approach. Main results: In this update, we included 70 RCTs (involving 19,927 women at low, mixed or high risk of poor pregnancy outcomes) which compared omega-3 LCPUFA interventions (supplements and food) compared with placebo or no omega-3. Overall study-level risk of bias was mixed, with selection and performance bias mostly at low risk, but there was high risk of attrition bias in some trials. Most trials were conducted in upper-middle or high-income countries; and nearly half the trials included women at increased/high risk for factors which might increase the risk of adverse maternal and birth outcomes. Preterm birth < 37 weeks (13.4% versus 11.9%; risk ratio (RR) 0.89, 95% confidence interval (CI) 0.81 to 0.97; 26 RCTs, 10,304 participants; high-quality evidence) and early preterm birth < 34 weeks (4.6% versus 2.7%; RR 0.58, 95% CI 0.44 to 0.77; 9 RCTs, 5204 participants; high-quality evidence) were both lower in women who received omega-3 LCPUFA compared with no omega-3. Prolonged gestation > 42 weeks was probably increased from 1.6% to 2.6% in women who received omega-3 LCPUFA compared with no omega-3 (RR 1.61 95% CI 1.11 to 2.33; 5141 participants; 6 RCTs; moderate-quality evidence).For infants, there was a possibly reduced risk of perinatal death (RR 0.75, 95% CI 0.54 to 1.03; 10 RCTs, 7416 participants; moderate-quality evidence: 62/3715 versus 83/3701 infants) and possibly fewer neonatal care admissions (RR 0.92, 95% CI 0.83 to 1.03; 9 RCTs, 6920 participants; moderate-quality evidence - 483/3475 infants versus 519/3445 infants). There was a reduced risk of low birthweight (LBW) babies (15.6% versus 14%; RR 0.90, 95% CI 0.82 to 0.99; 15 trials, 8449 participants; high-quality evidence); but a possible small increase in large-for-gestational age (LGA) babies (RR 1.15, 95% CI 0.97 to 1.36; 6 RCTs, 3722 participants; moderate-quality evidence, for omega-3 LCPUFA compared with no omega-3. Little or no difference in small-for-gestational age or intrauterine growth restriction (RR 1.01, 95% CI 0.90 to 1.13; 8 RCTs, 6907 participants; moderate-quality evidence) was seen. For the maternal outcomes, there is insufficient evidence to determine the effects of omega-3 on induction post-term (average RR 0.82, 95% CI 0.22 to 2.98; 3 trials, 2900 participants; low-quality evidence), maternal serious adverse events (RR 1.04, 95% CI 0.40 to 2.72; 2 trials, 2690 participants; low-quality evidence), maternal admission to intensive care (RR 0.56, 95% CI 0.12 to 2.63; 2 trials, 2458 participants; low-quality evidence), or postnatal depression (average RR 0.99, 95% CI 0.56 to 1.77; 2 trials, 2431 participants; low-quality evidence). Mean gestational length was greater in women who received omega-3 LCPUFA (mean difference (MD) 1.67 days, 95% CI 0.95 to 2.39; 41 trials, 12,517 participants; moderate-quality evidence), and pre-eclampsia may possibly be reduced with omega-3 LCPUFA (RR 0.84, 95% CI 0.69 to 1.01; 20 trials, 8306 participants; low-quality evidence).For the child/adult outcomes, very few differences between antenatal omega-3 LCPUFA supplementation and no omega-3 were observed in cognition, IQ, vision, other neurodevelopment and growth outcomes, language and behaviour (mostly low-quality to very low-quality evidence). The effect of omega-3 LCPUFA on body mass index at 19 years (MD 0, 95% CI -0.83 to 0.83; 1 trial, 243 participants; very low-quality evidence) was uncertain. No data were reported for development of diabetes in the children of study participants. Authors' conclusions: In the overall analysis, preterm birth < 37 weeks and early preterm birth < 34 weeks were reduced in women receiving omega-3 LCPUFA compared with no omega-3. There was a possibly reduced risk of perinatal death and of neonatal care admission, a reduced risk of LBW babies; and possibly a small increased risk of LGA babies with omega-3 LCPUFA.For our GRADE quality assessments, we assessed most of the important perinatal outcomes as high-quality (e.g. preterm birth) or moderate-quality evidence (e.g. perinatal death). For the other outcome domains (maternal, child/adult and health service outcomes) GRADE ratings ranged from moderate to very low, with over half rated as low. Reasons for downgrading across the domain were mostly due to design limitations and imprecision. Omega-3 LCPUFA supplementation during pregnancy is an effective strategy for reducing the incidence of preterm birth, although it probably increases the incidence of post-term pregnancies. More studies comparing omega-3 LCPUFA and placebo (to establish causality in relation to preterm birth) are not needed at this stage. A further 23 ongoing trials are still to report on over 5000 women, so no more RCTs are needed that compare omega-3 LCPUFA against placebo or no intervention. However, further follow-up of completed trials is needed to assess longer-term outcomes for mother and child, to improve understanding of metabolic, growth and neurodevelopment pathways in particular, and to establish if, and how, outcomes vary by different types of omega-3 LCPUFA, timing and doses; or by characteristics of women.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · meta-analysis · 254 citationsread the source →

Electronic cigarettes for smoking cessation.

Background: Electronic cigarettes (ECs) are handheld electronic vaping devices which produce an aerosol by heating an e-liquid. Some people who smoke use ECs to stop or reduce smoking, although some organizations, advocacy groups and policymakers have discouraged this, citing lack of evidence of efficacy and safety. People who smoke, healthcare providers and regulators want to know if ECs can help people quit smoking, and if they are safe to use for this purpose. This is a review update conducted as part of a living systematic review. Objectives: To examine the effectiveness, tolerability, and safety of using electronic cigarettes (ECs) to help people who smoke tobacco achieve long-term smoking abstinence. Search methods: We searched the Cochrane Tobacco Addiction Group's Specialized Register, the Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL), MEDLINE, Embase, and PsycINFO to 1 July 2022, and reference-checked and contacted study authors.  SELECTION CRITERIA: We included randomized controlled trials (RCTs) and randomized cross-over trials, in which people who smoke were randomized to an EC or control condition. We also included uncontrolled intervention studies in which all participants received an EC intervention. Studies had to report abstinence from cigarettes at six months or longer or data on safety markers at one week or longer, or both. Data collection and analysis: We followed standard Cochrane methods for screening and data extraction. Our primary outcome measures were abstinence from smoking after at least six months follow-up, adverse events (AEs), and serious adverse events (SAEs). Secondary outcomes included the proportion of people still using study product (EC or pharmacotherapy) at six or more months after randomization or starting EC use, changes in carbon monoxide (CO), blood pressure (BP), heart rate, arterial oxygen saturation, lung function, and levels of carcinogens or toxicants, or both. We used a fixed-effect Mantel-Haenszel model to calculate risk ratios (RRs) with a 95% confidence interval (CI) for dichotomous outcomes. For continuous outcomes, we calculated mean differences. Where appropriate, we pooled data in meta-analyses. Main results: We included 78 completed studies, representing 22,052 participants, of which 40 were RCTs. Seventeen of the 78 included studies were new to this review update. Of the included studies, we rated ten (all but one contributing to our main comparisons) at low risk of bias overall, 50 at high risk overall (including all non-randomized studies), and the remainder at unclear risk. There was high certainty that quit rates were higher in people randomized to nicotine EC than in those randomized to nicotine replacement therapy (NRT) (RR 1.63, 95% CI 1.30 to 2.04; I2 = 10%; 6 studies, 2378 participants). In absolute terms, this might translate to an additional four quitters per 100 (95% CI 2 to 6). There was moderate-certainty evidence (limited by imprecision) that the rate of occurrence of AEs was similar between groups (RR 1.02, 95% CI 0.88 to 1.19; I2 = 0%; 4 studies, 1702 participants). SAEs were rare, but there was insufficient evidence to determine whether rates differed between groups due to very serious imprecision (RR 1.12, 95% CI 0.82 to 1.52; I2 = 34%; 5 studies, 2411 participants). There was moderate-certainty evidence, limited by imprecision, that quit rates were higher in people randomized to nicotine EC than to non-nicotine EC (RR 1.94, 95% CI 1.21 to 3.13; I2 = 0%; 5 studies, 1447 participants). In absolute terms, this might lead to an additional seven quitters per 100 (95% CI 2 to 16). There was moderate-certainty evidence of no difference in the rate of AEs between these groups (RR 1.01, 95% CI 0.91 to 1.11; I2 = 0%; 5 studies, 1840 participants). There was insufficient evidence to determine whether rates of SAEs differed between groups, due to very serious imprecision (RR 1.00, 95% CI 0.56 to 1.79; I2 = 0%; 8 studies, 1272 participants). Compared to behavioural support only/no support, quit rates were higher for participants randomized to nicotine EC (RR 2.66, 95% CI 1.52 to 4.65; I2 = 0%; 7 studies, 3126 participants). In absolute terms, this represents an additional two quitters per 100 (95% CI 1 to 3). However, this finding was of very low certainty, due to issues with imprecision and risk of bias. There was some evidence that (non-serious) AEs were more common in people randomized to nicotine EC (RR 1.22, 95% CI 1.12 to 1.32; I2 = 41%, low certainty; 4 studies, 765 participants) and, again, insufficient evidence to determine whether rates of SAEs differed between groups (RR 1.03, 95% CI 0.54 to 1.97; I2 = 38%; 9 studies, 1993 participants).  Data from non-randomized studies were consistent with RCT data. The most commonly reported AEs were throat/mouth irritation, headache, cough, and nausea, which tended to dissipate with continued EC use. Very few studies reported data on other outcomes or comparisons, hence evidence for these is limited, with CIs often encompassing clinically significant harm and benefit. Authors' conclusions: There is high-certainty evidence that ECs with nicotine increase quit rates compared to NRT and moderate-certainty evidence that they increase quit rates compared to ECs without nicotine. Evidence comparing nicotine EC with usual care/no treatment also suggests benefit, but is less certain. More studies are needed to confirm the effect size. Confidence intervals were for the most part wide for data on AEs, SAEs and other safety markers, with no difference in AEs between nicotine and non-nicotine ECs nor between nicotine ECs and NRT. Overall incidence of SAEs was low across all study arms. We did not detect evidence of serious harm from nicotine EC, but longest follow-up was two years and the number of studies was small. The main limitation of the evidence base remains imprecision due to the small number of RCTs, often with low event rates, but further RCTs are underway. To ensure the review continues to provide up-to-date information to decision-makers, this review is a living systematic review. We run searches monthly, with the review updated when relevant new evidence becomes available. Please refer to the Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews for the review's current status.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · systematic review · 147 citationsread the source →

Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACEs) questionnaire and Adult Attachment Interview (AAI): implications for parent child relationships.

Although Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACEs) are linked to increased health problems and risk behaviors in adulthood, there are no studies on the association between ACEs and adults' states of mind regarding their early childhood attachments, loss, and trauma experiences. To validate the ACEs questions, we analyzed the association between ACEs and emotional support indicators and Adult Attachment Interview (AAI) classifications in terms of unresolved mourning regarding past loss or trauma and discordant states of mind in cannot classify (U/CC) interviews. Seventy-five urban women (41 clinical and 34 community) completed a questionnaire on ACEs, which included 10 categories of abuse, neglect, and household dysfunction, in addition to emotional support. Internal psychological processes or states of mind concerning attachment were assessed using the AAI. ACE responses were internally consistent (Cronbach's α=.88). In the clinical sample, 84% reported≥4 ACEs compared to 27% among the community sample. AAIs judged U/CC occurred in 76% of the clinical sample compared to 9% in the community sample. When ACEs were≥4, 65% of AAIs were classified U/CC. Absence of emotional support in the ACEs questionnaire was associated with 72% of AAIs being classified U/CC. As the number of ACEs and the lack of emotional support increases so too does the probability of AAIs being classified as U/CC. Findings provide rationale for including ACEs questions in pediatric screening protocols to identify and offer treatment reducing the intergenerational transmission of risk associated with problematic parenting.

Child abuse & neglect · 233 citationsread the source →

The impact of end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) on close persons: a literature review

Kidney disease is defined as end-stage when a patient's glomerular filtration rate has fallen to <15 ml/min/ 1.73 m2 [1]. Mortality associated with end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) is high [2]. The incidence of treated ESKD is rising in the western world, with a corresponding increase in the incidence of diabetes and cardiovascular disease, especially in ethnic minority groups. Survival on dialysis has been shown to be poorer in the older age group, especially in patients with increased comorbidity and in those whose functional status at the start of dialysis is poor [3]. Whilst renal transplant rates vary between different countries [4], the liberalization in the acceptance of older people into renal replacement therapy (RRT) programmes, together with changes in population demographics and the fact that kidney transplantation is less suitable for this group of older patients, means that dialysis may be the only treatment option available for an increasing number of patients aged 65 years and over [5]. Recent health policy changes in the OECD countries [6,7] acknowledge that end of life care may be more appropriate for some of these people, and maximum conservative management programmes (where residual renal function is supported, haemoglobin levels maintained and symptoms relieved) have been introduced into many renal units, particularly in the United Kingdom [6]. The onset of ESKD and subsequent recommendation of dialysis as a treatment option involves a change in lifestyle for both patients and close persons [8]. Even before end-stage disease is reached, as renal function deteriorates, patients frequently require additional support, and it is often family members who provide this [9]. In the UK it is estimated that 9 out of 10 carers of patients with either physical or neurological disabilities will be close relatives. In particular when home haemodialysis is undertaken, family members have been involved in supporting patients [10,11]. Studies have shown that good family support is associated with successful adaptation to dialysis and compliance with dietary restrictions [12,13]. Conversely, one of the main factors associated with patients discontinuing dialysis is patients’ perception that they have become a ‘burden’ to close family members [14]. There is therefore a need for health professionals to be aware of the important contribution that close persons make to the care of renal patients, to communicate effectively with them and to provide bereavement support for this group when appropriate [15]. The literature on close persons of patients with renal disease has identified two main areas of impact. Firstly, both haemodialysis and peritoneal dialysis may have a disruptive influence on family members’ social lives [16] and the structure of the week may be geared towards dialysis sessions. Secondly, some patients become frail and lose functional independence, leaving family members to provide greater physical support. Family members may have health and social care needs of their own that need to be addressed [16,17]. Qyinan [18] reported that close persons commonly felt overwhelmed and stressed, although this review was limited to an evidence base of four articles and considered home dialysis only. Campbell [19] used findings from the general carer literature to illustrate demands of ageing partners with ESKD. In other chronic illnesses such as stroke [20] or in palliative care for cancer and mental health [21], interventions aimed at providing family members with training to support patients with their rehabilitation, or to address unmet needs as a result of the patient's illness, have been developed and evaluated. Results have been mixed. In the case of stroke, carers in the intervention group experienced less depression and anxiety and better quality of life [20], whilst in the palliative care study, no statistically significant differences were found between the intervention and control group on carers’ psychological outcomes [21]. However, before such interventions can be developed in ESKD, it is important to understand better the emotional and physical needs of close persons. This review aims to identify all studies involving close persons caring for ESKD patients, to describe the main findings and critique the methodology. Specific attention has been paid to (a) studies exploring the impact of ESKD on close persons, in particular for those close persons where the patients are either withdrawing from dialysis or being provided with end of life care and (b) studies looking at the provision of health care for close persons. A literature search for relevant articles was conducted in five databases: Medline (1950–2006), Embase (1991–2006), CINAHL (1982–2006), PsycINFO (1970–2006) and AMED (1985–2006), employing the following key words: carers, caregivers, end-stage kidney disease, end-stage renal disease, haemodialysis, peritoneal dialysis and renal replacement therapy. These keywords were used both in word search options and exploded as thesaurus terms to obtain the maximum number of articles. The abstracts for each article were read to check for inclusion into the main review, using the following criteria: Published in peer-reviewed journals. Research studies with an introduction, a methodology and results section and a conclusion. Involve close persons, defined as either a family member or the person identified by the patient as an informal carer. By an informal carer, we mean a person who provides the majority of a patient's physical and emotional care needs and who is neither a volunteer nor in the employment of statutory services. Use a sample of close persons caring for adult ESKD patients (over 18 years). Non-English language articles were considered if the English translation of the abstract met the above criteria. Using these criteria, 334 articles were identified from the five databases (139 in Medline, 121 in Embase, 80 in CINAHL, 8 in AMED and 34 in PsycINFO). J.L. went through the abstracts of each of the 382 articles, of which 37 initially met the inclusion criteria. One was later excluded on closer inspection, as it was specifically a validation study of a fatigue severity scale. Of the remaining 36 studies, 16 exclusively looked at family members, 12 specifically at the patient-family dyad and 3 at the family-health professional dyad. Whilst the latter two types of studies did not concentrate solely on family concerns, we decided to include them in the analysis, because these findings further contribute to the limited number of studies in this field. Thirty-six studies were included in the review. Both J.L. and G.S. first went through the remaining 36 studies independently and extracted the following information for each study: the number of carers in the study sample, the RRT population they were caring for, authors’ definition of a carer, demographic details of the sample, patients’ dialysis history, caring history, study design, outcome measures used and main findings. J.L. and G.S. then met together to discuss these findings and obtain an initial consensus before meeting with A.B. and L.J. to obtain a final consensus. We undertook an exploration of the aims of these studies, their study design, the sample of participants and the outcome measures highlighted in the quantitative studies. The three main themes explored were (a) the impact of caring for a patient with ESKD on dialysis on close persons, in particular quality of life, psychological morbidity, close person responsibilities—which authors often referred to as ‘burden’ or ‘carer burden’—and their life situation; (b) the coping strategies employed by these close persons and (c) factors that influence psychological morbidity. No studies of health provision for close persons of patients with ESKD were identified. Four studies looking at end of life issues explored the following themes for close persons: (a) their perceptions of patients’ terminal symptoms; (b) their reasons for why patients decided to stop dialysis; (c) the long-term impact of patient death following dialysis cessation and (d) their perceptions of advance directives. End of life care may be provided by the renal multi-disciplinary team alone, or it may involve referral for specialist palliative care advice. Such advice is likely to include symptom control, attention to spiritual and psychological issues for patients and, where possible, involvement of their families in decision-making. Whilst most studies were interested in the direct impact on close persons only, one triangulated close person data with patient data. The majority of studies reviewed used a cross-sectional design; there was only one longitudinal study. Whilst most were quantitative (24/36), there were some qualitative studies (11/36) and one used a mixed methods approach. The total sample was predominantly female, with mean ages ranging from 41 to 68 years (analysis possible in only 18 studies). Sample sizes also tended to be small, with a median sample of 55 participants for the quantitative and 15 participants for the qualitative studies. Most of the sample was recruited in studies where associated patients were undergoing haemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis. Three studies also involved kidney transplant patients. Only five studies looked at close persons dealing with end of life issues or with patients withdrawing from dialysis. Many studies did not focus on close persons in their potential role as ‘informal carers’. Thirteen studies actively sought close persons who also considered themselves to be informal carers, of which eight provided full definitions of what they meant by this term. All studies included spouses as part of their sample, of which eight specifically concentrated on this group alone. Adult children were included in seven of these studies and parents in five. A wide variety of outcome measures were used to rate health-related quality of life, anxiety, depression, coping strategies and patient disease severity. Some studies used standardized outcome measures; others used simple self-rated tools. The most commonly used standardized measures were the Zarit Burden Interview [22] to evaluate the sense of carer responsibility (3/8), the Beck Depression Scale [23] to evaluate depression (2/5), SF-36 [24] to evaluate health-related quality of life (3/8), Jalowiec Coping Scale [25] to evaluate close persons’ use of coping strategies (3/3) and End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index [26] to evaluate patients’ disease severity (2/4). A breakdown of the country of origin for each study showed that over half originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada (7/36), with five originating from Australia and only seven from the European Union, of which only one was conducted in the UK. The remaining six studies came from the following countries: Japan (2/36), Brazil (2/36), China (1/36) and Turkey (1/36). The 36 studies have shown mixed results. They have mainly explored the following areas associated with caring for an ESKD patient: the impact on close persons and their social life and the factors affecting close persons’ psychological health. There have been very few studies looking at palliative care issues and these have primarily concentrated on dealing with end of life issues rather than the provision of supportive care in the pre-terminal phase. In only one study, close persons rated their quality of life as excellent and reported few pressures resulting from their carer responsibilities [27], whilst in all others, ESKD and dialysis were shown to increase the close person's sense of responsibility and lead to a poorer quality of life when compared with age-matched controls [28]. Close persons found living with an ESKD patient on dialysis stressful [29] and experienced increased fatigue [30]. The dominating effect of caring for an ESKD patient often led close persons to neglect their own health. For those who took time to have a break from their carer responsibilities, there were health benefits [31]. Other issues that close persons reported included isolation through the loss of social activity [30–36], life restrictions [36–38], increased workload, negative economic consequences [39,40], changed relationship with the patient [30,34] and sexual problems for spouses [41]. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. The treatment modality may also have an impact on family members. Studies have highlighted that spouses of transplant patients were more assertive, self-sufficient and able to handle the physical, social and existential aspects of the illness better than dialysis spouses [33,42]. Despite these pressures, close persons recognized that they play a positive role in promoting patients’ well-being [11,43]. They recognized that health care professionals were important in providing support to discuss their problems [39] and would like to have more information about the care being provided to patients [44]. However, they also reported poor communication with professionals, felt that their needs were not always addressed [30,39,45] and felt themselves uneducated and poorly equipped to deal with the regimented lifestyle associated with the dialysis regimen [14]. Whilst some studies have shown that close persons display few signs of psychological distress [40,46–49], others have identified the following: Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. A negative between close persons’ psychological health and their sense of carer responsibility their use of coping strategies strategies that the symptoms of the of the the close person's age and the social and changes as a result of ESKD A positive between good mental health and the following a of of dialysis the of dialysis patients are on of social support and sense of carer responsibility The sense of carer responsibilities are if patients are in of living have less or comorbidity This was further in studies in patients home haemodialysis or transplant where close persons not anxiety or depression felt less by their carer responsibility and a quality of life to the age-matched population were found between levels of responsibility and other outcomes such as quality of life and The use of coping was found to have a negative with a positive with the number of years on dialysis Close persons were more likely to have negative towards patients if they no of the dialysis and a high of involvement with the caring whilst living in a We identified five studies that explored end of life only one specifically on close persons. This study the long-term impact of death on families when dialysis was found that most families felt that patients a good death as at and with close people and most family members showed only levels of However, carers and those with levels of caring responsibility for the did End of life care HD = End of life care HD = The remaining four studies on patient outcomes such as reasons for withdrawing from dialysis the quality of death the of close persons in ESKD patients’ to and care and use of advance as a in advance by patients, which the of treatment to be by health care a patient is to provide to that person's of These studies found that close persons that whilst most patients a many patients were to be in and from fatigue care family members in that patients’ were and most recognized the of living which they felt were health care professional Close persons were poorly for caring for a dialysis and patients did not to be a on their families [14]. They were also poor at both patients’ and for or dialysis No studies were identified for carers of patients with supportive care those on maximum conservative management The main of most studies included in this review is the of and of the demographic over half of the studies demographic details of close persons’ ages and or details of their relationship to patients of other relevant demographic such as employment status or social is and only seven studies the time that close persons as Whilst all studies the of dialysis half reported the of time a patient has been on with very few patients’ functional although carer studies in other that this has an impact on carers’ quality of life In only 18 9 qualitative and mixed methods study details of their sample of the quantitative studies included in the used cross-sectional and were predominantly Such studies are in exploring between are limited as they not to be only five studies provide the full details of sample it is therefore not possible to rates or the sample The sample sizes were with a median of 55 and details of were reported in only one study. the of the used to the different outcomes it to between the different studies. We identified that most studies poor of their methods and a of of their data Most used of family members with five studies using only one details of their studies with their studies with their one a of their their approach. One study no details of their the studies were poorly that the was and authors were as to to use qualitative data with the and of the qualitative data demographic of data and poor use of supporting This study reviewed the literature exploring the of close persons of patients with ESKD, from which can be the quality of and for the of in this Firstly, studies exploring end of life issues are with only four identified. these four studies are they that health are the time for informal carers to discuss patients’ about end of life care and, long-term distress of close persons resulting from the patients’ However, about such end of life issues close persons, and we studies in this Secondly, definitions of close persons were there were some differences identified between the different groups. the literature the that most close persons are to patients, the in to patients who were and those with family and relationship were not not all close persons to on the role of the informal carer, and the of this role can be a as illness review did not identify differences between informal carers and family carers in the outcome measures used included both the of differences may in their with ‘informal carers’ a more members’ may be as being more this needs further issues that need to be addressed the use of methodology were identified in the Most quantitative studies were and with no intervention studies being identified. Studies of demographic details and rates and all were cross-sectional with sample sizes that used standardized Whilst the use of standardized measures the of the the findings from cross-sectional studies are limited in that they can only between We the use of longitudinal methods in that would that between key be explored in more This would also into the long-term of close persons. In those studies using qualitative most used with poor and of demographic and social and Many authors used the ‘burden’ or ‘carer such terms may influence of the relationship between close person and was not they were by close persons to use the ‘burden’ or it was a by the authors to describe the responsibilities of Such and the of study findings the half of the studies originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada This it to the results of these studies their to in the of health care provision in other there is evidence that the psychological health of close persons them to to care which in can the mental health of patients, we to identify studies in review that looked specifically at health close persons of patients with ESKD. review has identified in the literature that need to be is therefore to the relationship between health and close persons in to We would like to acknowledge for this review and for support in this of

Clinical Kidney Journal · editorial or comment · 83 citationsread the source →

Cognitive behavioural therapy for adherence and depression in patients with HIV: a three-arm randomised controlled trial.

Background: Depression is highly prevalent in people with HIV and has consistently been associated with poor antiretroviral therapy (ART) adherence. Integrating cognitive behavioural therapy (CBT) for depression with adherence counselling using the Life-Steps approach (CBT-AD) has an emerging evidence base. The aim of this study was to test the efficacy of CBT-AD. Methods: In this three-arm randomised controlled trial in HIV-positive adults with depression, we compared CBT-AD with information and supportive psychotherapy plus adherence counselling using the Life-Steps approach (ISP-AD), and with enhanced treatment as usual (ETAU) including Life-Steps adherence counselling only. Participants were recruited from three sites in New England, USA (two hospital settings and one community health centre). Patients were randomly assigned (2:2:1) to receive CBT-AD (one Life-Steps session plus 11 weekly integrated sessions lasting up to 1 h each), ISP-AD (one Life-Steps session plus 11 weekly integrated sessions lasting up to 1 h each), or ETAU (one Life-Steps session and five assessment visits roughly every 2 weeks), randomisation was done with allocation software, in pairs, and stratified by three variables: study site, whether or not participants had been prescribed antidepressant medication, and whether or not participants had a history of injection drug use. The primary outcome was ART adherence at the end of treatment (4 month assessment) assessed via electronic pill caps (Medication Event Monitoring System [MEMS]) with correction for pocketed doses, analysed by intention to treat. Findings: Patients were recruited from Feb 26, 2009, to June 21, 2012. Patients who were assigned to CBT-AD (94 randomly assigned, 83 completed assessment) had greater improvements in adherence (estimated difference 1·00 percentage point per visit, 95% CI 0·34 to 1·66, p=0·003) and depression (Center for Epidemiological Studies depression [CESD] score estimated difference -0·41, -0·66 to -0·16, p=0·001; Montgomery-Asberg depression rating scale [MADRS] score -4·69, -8·09 to -1·28, p=0·007; clinical global impression [CGI] score -0·66, -1·11 to -0·21, p=0·005) than did patients who had ETAU (49 assigned, 46 completed assessment) after treatment (4 months). No significant differences in adherence were noted between CBT-AD and ISP-AD (97 assigned, 87 completed assessment). No study-related adverse events were reported. Interpretation: Integrating evidenced-based treatment for depression with evidenced-based adherence counselling is helpful for individuals living with HIV/AIDS and depression. Future efforts should examine how to best disseminate effective psychosocial depression treatments such as CBT-AD to people living with HIV/AIDS and examine the cost-effectiveness of such approaches. Funding: National Institute of Mental Health, National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases.

The lancet. HIV · randomised controlled trial · 114 citationsread the source →

The effects of volunteering on loneliness among lonely older adults: the HEAL-HOA dual randomised controlled trial.

Background: Previous randomised controlled trials have largely relied on self-reported volunteer work to assess the effects of volunteering and have rarely provided structured volunteering activities during the intervention period. The present study aimed to investigate the effects of social volunteering work over 12 months on loneliness among older adults during the COVID-19 pandemic. Methods: A dual randomised controlled trial was done in Hong Kong to investigate the long-term effects of telephone-delivered psychosocial interventions by older Chinese volunteers who were screened as lonely, for older adult recipients who had low income, lived alone, felt lonely, and were digitally excluded. Participants were included if they were aged 50-70 years; had provided consent to be trained and serve as a volunteer for at least 2 h per week for 6 months; had at least 3 years of secondary school education; had no severe self-reported physical, mental, or cognitive health problems; were not working full or part-time; had engaged in formal volunteering fewer than four times within the past year; and were lonely (ie, had a score of at least 6 on the three-item UCLA Loneliness Scale). Participants were allocated into either the volunteering or control group (psychoeducation programme) using a random number method. The details of group allocation were concealed as the research assistant responsible for randomisation was different to the research assistants responsible for recruitment and assessments (who were masked to the condition). Following a 6-week training, the volunteers delivered a psychosocial intervention to older intervention recipients for 6 months. The primary outcome was loneliness measured with the 20-item UCLA Loneliness Scale and the De Jong Gierveld (DJG) Loneliness Scales at 6 months and 12 months. Assessments were performed before training (baseline; T1), at 6 months (T2), and at 12 months after training (T3). The intention-to-treat principle was used to compare the effects of volunteering between the two groups. The trial was registered in the Clinical Trials Registry of the University of Hong Kong Clinical Trials Centre (HKUCTR-2929). This trial has completed. Findings: Between May 3, 2021, and Oct 6, 2022, a total of 375 individuals were recruited to the trial, including 84 males (22%) and 291 females (78%). 185 were randomly assigned to the volunteering group (56 to deliver a mindfulness intervention, 65 to deliver a behavioural activation intervention, and 64 to deliver a befriending intervention) and 190 were assigned to the control group. 311 (83%) of 375 participants were 60 years or older (median 64 years [SD 4·86]). Participants in the volunteering group reported a significantly lower level of loneliness at T2 (dppc2 ranged from -0·41 to -0·70) compared with T1 than participants in the control condition. There was a significant decrease in loneliness measured using the UCLA Loneliness Scale at T2 in the volunteering group but such a decline was not shown in the control group (condition × time interaction, estimate 0·19 [95% CI 0·08 to 0·29], p=0·00058, dppc2=-0·41). Similarly, when measured with the DJG Loneliness Scale, there was a significantly greater decrease in loneliness in the volunteering group compared with the control group at T2, including a medium to large effect size on total DJG scores (estimate 1·34 [95% CI 0·83 to 1·84], p<0·0001, dppc2=-0·70) and a medium effect size on emotional (estimate 0·63 [0·35 to 0·90], p<0·0001, dppc2=-0·59) and social subscales (estimate 0·71 [95% CI 0·37 to 1·05], p<0·0001, dppc2=-0·58). Although most of the positive effects of volunteering were not sustained at T3, the volunteers who continued to volunteer for more than 2 h per week at T3 reported lower levels of loneliness than those who did not maintain volunteering. Interpretation: This randomised controlled trial demonstrates the beneficial effect of volunteering on reducing loneliness in older adults who feel lonely, and that this benefit can be maintained through continued participation in voluntary work. Future intervention programmes should strengthen older adults' commitment to volunteer. Funding: Research Grants Committee of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, China.

The lancet. Healthy longevity · randomised controlled trial · 16 citationsread the source →

Short-course radiotherapy followed by chemotherapy before total mesorectal excision (TME) versus preoperative chemoradiotherapy, TME, and optional adjuvant chemotherapy in locally advanced rectal cancer (RAPIDO): a randomised, open-label, phase 3 trial.

Background: Systemic relapses remain a major problem in locally advanced rectal cancer. Using short-course radiotherapy followed by chemotherapy and delayed surgery, the Rectal cancer And Preoperative Induction therapy followed by Dedicated Operation (RAPIDO) trial aimed to reduce distant metastases without compromising locoregional control. Methods: In this multicentre, open-label, randomised, controlled, phase 3 trial, participants were recruited from 54 centres in the Netherlands, Sweden, Spain, Slovenia, Denmark, Norway, and the USA. Patients were eligible if they were aged 18 years or older, with an Eastern Cooperative Oncology Group (ECOG) performance status of 0-1, had a biopsy-proven, newly diagnosed, primary, locally advanced rectal adenocarcinoma, which was classified as high risk on pelvic MRI (with at least one of the following criteria: clinical tumour [cT] stage cT4a or cT4b, extramural vascular invasion, clinical nodal [cN] stage cN2, involved mesorectal fascia, or enlarged lateral lymph nodes), were mentally and physically fit for chemotherapy, and could be assessed for staging within 5 weeks before randomisation. Eligible participants were randomly assigned (1:1), using a management system with a randomly varying block design (each block size randomly chosen to contain two to four allocations), stratified by centre, ECOG performance status, cT stage, and cN stage, to either the experimental or standard of care group. All investigators remained masked for the primary endpoint until a prespecified number of events was reached. Patients allocated to the experimental treatment group received short-course radiotherapy (5 × 5 Gy over a maximum of 8 days) followed by six cycles of CAPOX chemotherapy (capecitabine 1000 mg/m2 orally twice daily on days 1-14, oxaliplatin 130 mg/m2 intravenously on day 1, and a chemotherapy-free interval between days 15-21) or nine cycles of FOLFOX4 (oxaliplatin 85 mg/m2 intravenously on day 1, leucovorin [folinic acid] 200 mg/m2 intravenously on days 1 and 2, followed by bolus fluorouracil 400 mg/m2 intravenously and fluorouracil 600 mg/m2 intravenously for 22 h on days 1 and 2, and a chemotherapy-free interval between days 3-14) followed by total mesorectal excision. Choice of CAPOX or FOLFOX4 was per physician discretion or hospital policy. Patients allocated to the standard of care group received 28 daily fractions of 1·8 Gy up to 50·4 Gy or 25 fractions of 2·0 Gy up to 50·0 Gy (per physician discretion or hospital policy), with concomitant twice-daily oral capecitabine 825 mg/m2 followed by total mesorectal excision and, if stipulated by hospital policy, adjuvant chemotherapy with eight cycles of CAPOX or 12 cycles of FOLFOX4. The primary endpoint was 3-year disease-related treatment failure, defined as the first occurrence of locoregional failure, distant metastasis, new primary colorectal tumour, or treatment-related death, assessed in the intention-to-treat population. Safety was assessed by intention to treat. This study is registered with the EudraCT, 2010-023957-12, and ClinicalTrials.gov, NCT01558921, and is now complete. Findings: Between June 21, 2011, and June 2, 2016, 920 patients were enrolled and randomly assigned to a treatment, of whom 912 were eligible (462 in the experimental group; 450 in the standard of care group). Median follow-up was 4·6 years (IQR 3·5-5·5). At 3 years after randomisation, the cumulative probability of disease-related treatment failure was 23·7% (95% CI 19·8-27·6) in the experimental group versus 30·4% (26·1-34·6) in the standard of care group (hazard ratio 0·75, 95% CI 0·60-0·95; p=0·019). The most common grade 3 or higher adverse event during preoperative therapy in both groups was diarrhoea (81 [18%] of 460 patients in the experimental group and 41 [9%] of 441 in the standard of care group) and neurological toxicity during adjuvant chemotherapy in the standard of care group (16 [9%] of 187 patients). Serious adverse events occurred in 177 (38%) of 460 participants in the experimental group and, in the standard of care group, in 87 (34%) of 254 patients without adjuvant chemotherapy and in 64 (34%) of 187 with adjuvant chemotherapy. Treatment-related deaths occurred in four participants in the experimental group (one cardiac arrest, one pulmonary embolism, two infectious complications) and in four participants in the standard of care group (one pulmonary embolism, one neutropenic sepsis, one aspiration, one suicide due to severe depression). Interpretation: The observed decreased probability of disease-related treatment failure in the experimental group is probably indicative of the increased efficacy of preoperative chemotherapy as opposed to adjuvant chemotherapy in this setting. Therefore, the experimental treatment can be considered as a new standard of care in high-risk locally advanced rectal cancer. Funding: Dutch Cancer Foundation, Swedish Cancer Society, Spanish Ministry of Economy and Competitiveness, and Spanish Clinical Research Network.

The Lancet. Oncology · randomised controlled trial · 1212 citationsread the source →

Randomised clinical non-inferiority trial of breathing-based meditation and cognitive processing therapy for symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder in military veterans.

Objective: Test whether Sudarshan Kriya Yoga (SKY) was non-inferior to cognitive processing therapy (CPT) for treating symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) among veterans via a parallel randomised controlled non-inferiority trial. Setting: Outpatient Veterans Affairs healthcare centre. Participants: 85 veterans (75 men, 61% white, mean age 56.9) with symptoms of PTSD participated between October 2015 and March 2020: 59 participants completed the study. Interventions: SKY emphasises breathing routines and was delivered in group format in a 15-hour workshop followed by two 1-hour sessions per week for 5 weeks. CPT is an individual psychotherapy which emphasises shifting cognitive appraisals and was delivered in two 1-hour sessions per week for 6 weeks. Measures: The primary outcome measure was the PTSD Checklist-Civilian Version (PCL-C). The secondary measures were the Beck Depression Inventory-II (BDI-II) and Positive and Negative Affect Scale (PANAS). Results: Mean PCL-C at baseline was 56.5 (±12.6). Intent-to-treat analyses showed that PCL-C scores were reduced at 6 weeks (end of treatment) relative to baseline (SKY, -5.6, d=0.41, n=41: CPT, -6.8, d=0.58, n=44). The between-treatment difference in change scores was within the non-inferiority margin of 10 points (-1.2, 95% CI -5.7 to 3.3), suggesting SKY was not inferior to CPT. SKY was also non-inferior at 1-month (CPT-SKY: -2.1, 95% CI -6.9 to 2.8) and 1-year (CPT-SKY: -1.8, 95% CI -6.6 to 2.9) assessments. SKY was also non-inferior to CPT on the BDI-II and PANAS at end of treatment and 1 month, but SKY was inferior to CPT on both BDI-II and PANAS at 1 year. Dropout rates were similar (SKY, 27%, CPT, 34%: OR=1.36, 95% CI 0.51 to 3.62, p=0.54). Conclusions: SKY may be non-inferior to CPT for treating symptoms of PTSD and merits further consideration as a treatment for PTSD. Trial registration number: NCT02366403.

BMJ open · randomised controlled trial · 15 citationsread the source →

Promoting school climate and health outcomes with the SEHER multi-component secondary school intervention in Bihar, India: a cluster-randomised controlled trial.

Background: School environments affect health and academic outcomes. With increasing secondary school retention in low-income and middle-income countries, promoting quality school social environments could offer a scalable opportunity to improve adolescent health and wellbeing. Methods: We did a cluster-randomised trial to assess the effectiveness of a multi-component whole-school health promotion intervention (SEHER) with integrated economic and process evaluations in grade 9 students (aged 13-14 years) at government-run secondary schools in the Nalanda district of Bihar state, India. Schools were randomly assigned (1:1:1) to three groups: the SEHER intervention delivered by a lay counsellor (the SEHER Mitra [SM] group), the SEHER intervention delivered by a teacher (teacher as SEHER Mitra [TSM] group), and a control group in which only the standard government-run classroom-based life-skills Adolescence Education Program was implemented. The primary outcome was school climate measured with the Beyond Blue School Climate Questionnaire (BBSCQ). Students were assessed at the start of the academic year (June, 2015) and again 8 months later at the end of the academic year (March, 2016) via self-completed questionnaires. This study is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT02484014. Findings: Of the 112 eligible schools in the Nalanda district, 75 were randomly selected to participate in the trial. We randomly assigned 25 schools to each of the three groups. One school subsequently dropped out of the TSM group, leaving 24 schools in this group. The baseline survey included a total of 13 035 participants, and the endpoint survey included 14 414 participants. Participants in the SM-delivered intervention schools had substantially higher school climate scores at endpoint survey than those in the control group (BBSCQ baseline-adjusted mean difference [aMD] 7·57 [95% CI 6·11-9·03]; effect size 1·88 [95% CI 1·44-2·32], p<0·0001) and the TSM-delivered intervention (aMD 7·57 [95% CI 6·06-9·08]; effect size 1·88 [95% CI 1·43-2·34], p<0·0001). There was no effect of the TSM-delivered intervention compared with control (aMD -0·009 [95% CI -1·53 to 1·51], effect size 0·00 [95% CI -0·45 to 0·44], p=0·99). Compared with the control group, participants in the SM-delivered intervention schools had moderate to large improvements in the secondary outcomes of depression (aMD -1·23 [95% CI -1·89 to -0·57]), bullying (aMD -0·91 [95% CI -1·15 to -0·66]), violence victimisation (odds ratio [OR] 0·62 [95% CI 0·46-0·84]), violence perpetration (OR 0·68 [95% CI 0·48-0·96]), attitude towards gender equity (aMD 0·41 [95% CI 0·21-0·61]), and knowledge of reproductive and sexual health (aMD 0·29 [95% CI 0·06-0·53]). Similar results for these secondary outcomes were noted for the comparison between SM-delivered intervention schools and TSM-delivered intervention schools (depression: aMD -1·23 [95% CI -1·91 to -0·55]; bullying: aMD -0·83 [95% CI -1·08 to -0·57]; violence victimisation: OR 0·49 [95% CI 0·35-0·67]; violence perpetration: OR 0·49 [95% CI 0·34-0·71]; attitude towards gender equity: aMD 0·23 [95% CI 0·02-0·44]; and knowledge of reproductive and sexual health: aMD 0·22 [95% CI -0·02 to 0·47]). However, no effects on these secondary outcomes were observed for the TSM-delivered intervention schools compared with the control group (depression: aMD -0·03 [95% CI -0·70 to 0·65]; bullying: aMD -0·08 [95% CI -0·34 to 0·18]; violence victimisation: OR 1·27 [95% CI 0·93-1·73]; violence perpetration: OR 1·37 [95% CI 0·95-1·95]; attitude towards gender equity: aMD 0·17 [95% CI -0·09 to 0·38]; and knowledge of reproductive and sexual health: aMD 0·06 [95% CI -0·18 to 0·32]). Interpretation: The multi-component whole-school SEHER health promotion intervention had substantial beneficial effects on school climate and health-related outcomes when delivered by lay counsellors, but no effects when delivered by teachers. Future research should focus on the evaluation of the scaling up of the SEHER intervention in diverse contexts and delivery agents. Funding: John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Foundation, USA and the United Nations Population Fund India Office.

Lancet (London, England) · randomised controlled trial · 121 citationsread the source →

Smoking cessation for people with severe mental illness (SCIMITAR+): a pragmatic randomised controlled trial.

Background: People with severe mental illnesses such as schizophrenia are three times more likely to smoke than the wider population, contributing to widening health inequalities. Smoking remains the largest modifiable risk factor for this health inequality, but people with severe mental illness have not historically engaged with smoking cessation services. We aimed to test the effectiveness of a combined behavioural and pharmacological smoking cessation intervention targeted specifically at people with severe mental illness. Methods: In the smoking cessation intervention for severe mental illness (SCIMITAR+) trial, a pragmatic, randomised controlled study, we recruited heavy smokers with bipolar disorder or schizophrenia from 16 primary care and 21 community-based mental health sites in the UK. Participants were eligible if they were aged 18 years or older, and smoked at least five cigarettes per day. Exclusion criteria included substantial comorbid drug or alcohol problems and people who lacked capacity to consent at the time of recruitment. Using computer-generated random numbers, participants were randomly assigned (1:1) to a bespoke smoking cessation intervention or to usual care. Participants, mental health specialists, and primary care physicians were unmasked to assignment. The bespoke smoking cessation intervention consisted of behavioural support from a mental health smoking cessation practitioner and pharmacological aids for smoking cessation, with adaptations for people with severe mental illness-such as, extended pre-quit sessions, cut down to quit, and home visits. Access to pharmacotherapy was via primary care after discussion with the smoking cessation specialist. Under usual care participants were offered access to local smoking cessation services not specifically designed for people with severe mental illnesses. The primary endpoint was smoking cessation at 12 months ascertained via carbon monoxide measurements below 10 parts per million and self-reported cessation for the past 7 days. Secondary endpoints were biologically verified smoking cessation at 6 months; number of cigarettes smoked per day, Fagerström Test for Nicotine Dependence (FTND) and Motivation to Quit (MTQ) questionnaire; general and mental health functioning determined via the Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (PHQ-9), the Generalised Anxiety Disorder-7 (GAD-7) questionnaire, and 12-Item Short Form Health Survey (SF-12); and body-mass index (BMI). This trial was registerd with the ISRCTN registry, number ISRCTN72955454, and is complete. Findings: Between Oct 7, 2015, and Dec 16, 2016, 526 eligible patients were randomly assigned to the bespoke smoking cessation intervention (n=265) or usual care (n=261). 309 (59%) participants were male, median age was 47·2 years (IQR 36·3-54·5), with high nicotine dependence (mean 24 cigarettes per day [SD 13·2]), and the most common severe mental disorders were schizophrenia or other psychotic illness (n=343 [65%]), bipolar disorder (n=115 [22%]), and schizoaffective disorder (n=66 [13%]). 234 (88%) of intervention participants engaged with the treatment programme and attended 6·4 (SD 3·5) quit smoking sessions, with an average duration of 39 min (SD 17; median 35 min, range 5-120). Verified quit data at 12 months were available for 219 (84%) of 261 usual care and 223 (84%) of 265 intervention participants. The proportion of participants who had quit at 12 months was higher in the intervention group than in the usual care group, but non-significantly (34 [15%] of 223 [13% of those assigned to group] vs 22 [10%] of 219 [8% of those assigned to group], risk difference 5·2%, 95% CI -1·0 to 11·4; odds ratio [OR] 1·6, 95% CI 0·9 to 2·9; p=0·10). The proportion of participants who quit at 6 months was significantly higher in the intervention group than in the usual care group (32 [14%] of 226 vs 14 [6%] of 217; risk difference 7·7%, 95% CI 2·1 to 13·3; OR 2·4, 95% CI 1·2 to 4·6; p=0·010). The incidence rate ratio for number of cigarettes smoked per day at 6 months was 0·90 (95% CI 0·80 to 1·01; p=0·079), and at 12 months was 1·00 (0·89 to 1·13; p=0·95). At both 6 months and 12 months, the intervention group was non-significantly favoured in the FTND (adjusted mean difference 6 months -0·18, 95% CI -0·53 to 0·17, p=0·32; and 12 months -0·01, -0·39 to 0·38, p=0·97) and MTQ questionnaire (adjusted mean difference 0·58, -0·01 to 1·17, p=0·056; and 12 months 0·64, 0·04 to 1·24, p=0·038). The PHQ-9 showed no difference between the groups (adjusted mean difference at 6 months 0·20, 95% CI -0·85 to 1·24 vs 12 months -0·12, -1·18 to 0·94). For the SF-12 survey, we saw evidence of improvement in physical health in the intervention group at 6 months (adjusted mean difference 1·75, 95% CI 0·21 to 3·28), but this difference was not evident at 12 months (0·59, -1·07 to 2·26); and we saw no difference in mental health between the groups at 6 or 12 months (adjusted mean difference at 6 months -0·73, 95% CI -2·82 to 1·36, and 12 months -0·41, -2·35 to 1·53). The GAD-7 questionnaire showed no difference between the groups (adjusted mean difference at 6 months -0·32 95% CI -1·26 to 0·62 vs 12 months -0·10, -1·05 to 0·86). No difference in BMI was seen between the groups (adjusted mean difference 6 months 0·16, 95% CI -0·54 to 0·85; 12 months 0·25, -0·62 to 1·13). Interpretation: This bespoke intervention is a candidate model of smoking cessation for clinicians and policy makers to address high prevalence of smoking. The incidence of quitting at 6 months shows that smoking cessation can be achieved, but the waning of this effect by 12 months means more effort is needed for sustained quitting. Funding: National Institute for Health Research Health Technology Assessment Programme.

The lancet. Psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 134 citationsread the source →

The Social Epidemiology of Human Immunodeficiency Virus/Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome

Social epidemiology is defined as the study of the distribution of health outcomes and their social determinants (1). It builds on the classic epidemiologic triangle of host, agent, and environment to focus explicitly on the role of social determinants in infectious disease transmission and progression. These determinants are the “features of and pathways by which societal conditions affect health” (2, p. 697). Early studies of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) focused on individual characteristics and behaviors in determining HIV risk, an approach that Fee and Krieger (3) refer to as “biomedical individualism.” Biomedical individualism is the basis of risk factor epidemiology; by contrast, the social epidemiology perspective emphasizes social conditions as fundamental causes of disease (4) (table 1). Social epidemiologists examine how persons become exposed to risk or protective factors and under what social conditions individual risk factors are related to disease. Social factors are thus the focus of analysis and are not simply adjusted for as potentially confounding factors or used as proxies for unavailable individual-level data. Social factors are indeed critical to understanding nonuniform infectious disease patterns that emerge as a result of the dependent nature of disease transmission or the idea that an outcome in one person is dependent upon outcomes and exposures in others (5, 6). Contact patterns that enhance HIV/AIDS vulnerability may be conceptualized at multiple levels. Figure 1 distinguishes determinants of HIV/AIDS at three levels: individual, social, and structural. Individual factors include biologic, demographic, and behavioral risk factors that may influence the risk of HIV acquisition and disease progression. Social-level factors include critical pathways by which community and network structures link persons to society. These structures are central to understanding the diffusion and differential distribution of HIV/AIDS in population subgroups. Structural-level factors include social and economic factors, as well as laws and policies. These factors, in turn, affect HIV transmission dynamics and the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS. Infectious disease epidemiology provides models of the mechanisms through which social determinants affect HIV transmission (7). For example, the basic reproductive number of an infectious disease, R0 (8), describes secondary infections that arise from a primary infection. In the equation R0 = βCD, β is the probability of infection per contact, C is the number of contacts, and D is the duration of infectivity. The goal of intervention efforts is to reduce the empirical value of these terms by modifying the social conditions under which individual risk factors lead to disease. Examples of factors that affect the component terms of R0 in HIV epidemiology are presented in table 2. In this review, we present existing evidence linking social and structural determinants to HIV/AIDS. In addition, we discuss the implications of these findings for future social epidemiology research on HIV/AIDS as well as the design of more effective HIV/AIDS interventions. We searched the published literature to identify conceptual and empirical research reports on the social epidemiology of HIV/AIDS. Five databases were searched: PsycINFO (American Psychological Association, Washington, DC), PubMed (MEDLINE; National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Maryland), Social Science Citation Index (Web of Science; Thomson ISI, Stamford, Connecticut), Sociological Abstracts (CSA, Bethesda, Maryland), and Digital Dissertations (ProQuest; UMI, Ann Arbor, Michigan). Searches were designed to include the factors we specified in our framework as social or structural factors (figure 1). Searches were limited to published articles in the English language for the period 1981–2003. The following keywords were included in each search: AIDS/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, HIV, and epidemiol*. Additional searches were conducted by using combinations of keywords listed in Appendix table 1 corresponding with our framework. We identified four categories of social-level factors of importance to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: cultural context, social networks, neighborhood effects, and social capital. Each uses different conceptual and methodological approaches to examine the effects of social forces on population HIV/AIDS vulnerability. Anthropologist Edward Tylor defined culture as “that complex whole which includes knowledge, belief, art, law, morals, custom, and any other capabilities and habits acquired by man as a member of society” (9, p. 1). Anthropologic and epidemiologic approaches may be integrated in a variety of ways to identify features of the social environment that affect HIV/AIDS risk. One way to explore how the social environment affects HIV/AIDS epidemiology is through the use of mixed research methods. Mixed-methods study designs integrate qualitative and quantitative research methods either sequentially or concurrently (10). In sequential study designs, qualitative methods may be used to explore a topic under study or to explain quantitative epidemiologic findings. Concurrent study designs are meant to confirm, cross-validate, or corroborate findings within a single study. A common type of concurrent mixed methods study is “triangulation,” and this approach has been used extensively in rapid assessments of illicit drug use and HIV/AIDS (11–13). Mixed methods approaches are particularly well suited to the investigation of the often hidden and stigmatizing behavioral and social factors underlying HIV epidemics. One exemplary study combining qualitative methods with quantitative methods was conducted by Beyrer et al. (14) to examine the role of overland heroin trafficking routes in shaping explosive HIV/AIDS epidemics among injection drug users in Southeast Asia. Piecing together data from a variety of sources, including existing epidemiologic data, key informant interviews, and laboratory data, this study revealed that distinct HIV subtypes emerged and recombined along drug trafficking routes originating in Myanmar, one of the world’s largest heroin producers. Along these trafficking routes, communities of injection drug users formed, facilitating the spread of HIV into local communities in Laos, Thailand, Vietnam, India, and China (refer, for example, to Panda et al. (15)). This illustration highlights the broader understanding of HIV/AIDS epidemiology that can be achieved by examining the interplay between contextual factors and social and behavioral factors. Investigation of social networks in HIV/AIDS began with the mapping of relationships between one of the first identified AIDS cases, an airline steward, and a large number of his male sex partners in the early 1980s (16). Social network analysis generates measures of the quality, density, position, and structure of relationships between persons, including dyads (partnerships), personal networks (“egocentric” networks), and larger communities (“sociometric” networks) (17, 18). Social networks can influence health outcomes in direct and indirect ways, including 1) social influence, 2) social engagement and participation, 3) prevalence of infectious disease and network member mixing, 4) access to material goods and informational resources, and 5) social support (19). Researchers have demonstrated that patterns in the structure of relationships—rather than differences in individual risk behaviors alone—explain observed HIV patterns (20, 21). The theoretical foundation for examining social networks in HIV research is closely tied to advances in sexually transmitted disease (STD) epidemiology. A key concept from STD epidemiology is the notion of the “core group,” a small group of disease transmitters responsible for a large proportion of cases (22). Friedman et al. (23) found that individuals’ locations within sociometric risk networks were associated with HIV risk among a group of injection drug users in New York City. Other concepts from STD epidemiology, such as partner concurrency, bridging, and mixing patterns, are also important in understanding HIV risk (24–29). Specific network characteristics that have been associated with HIV/AIDS include the size of subgroups and their distribution in a network (23), the centrality of HIV-positive persons within networks (30), partner selection patterns (24, 31–33), and concurrent sexual partnerships (28). Inclusion of these variables has been shown to improve transmission estimates in mathematical modeling (34, 35). Social and normative influences have also been associated with individual HIV risks (36, 37). Network-related social and normative influences are predictive of illicit drug use (38) and condom use behavior (37, 39), highlighting the importance of network-based interventions for HIV prevention (18). Kelly et al. (40, 41) developed a popular opinion leader model that has been effective in reducing HIV risk in several populations, including men who have sex with men and women in low-income housing (42). The success of this model has led to its adaption for international use by the National Institute of Mental Health Collaborative HIV/STD Prevention Trial in China, India, Peru, Russia, and Zimbabwe. Neighborhoods represent the intersection of social networks and physical spatial locations, a confluence Wallace (43) has called the “sociogeographic networks” through which infectious diseases spread. Early interest in the role of neighborhood social environment in disease transmission was sparked by a study in Colorado Springs, Colorado, in which researchers found that gonorrhea was highly focused geographically in core residential neighborhoods (44). Both direct and indirect mechanisms may determine how neighborhood-level factors shape population HIV/AIDS patterns. Direct mechanisms are those that increase the likelihood of a person coming into contact with someone who is HIV positive, for example, through residential segregation and the social isolation of marginalized populations. Indirect mechanisms include those that increase population vulnerability to HIV/AIDS, such as exposure to poor socioeconomic conditions, high unemployment, or the proliferation of illicit drug markets. A range of neighborhood-level factors have been examined in relation to infectious disease, including poverty and income (45, 46), residential segregation (47), and neighborhood physical environment (48, 49). Current research in neighborhood and area effects on health emphasizes the importance of moving beyond documentation of associations to analyze the social and epidemiologic mechanisms through which neighborhood effects might operate (50–54). Increasing concentrations of affluence and poverty are contributing to what demographer Douglas Massey has called “a radical change in the geographic basis of human society” (55, p. 395). Powerful social and economic forces in US cities are increasing neighborhood segregation by class and race/ethnicity (56, 57). Resulting social disorganization and loss of resources and services in poor neighborhoods are in turn shaping HIV/AIDS patterns at the neighborhood level. In a number of studies in New York City, for example, Wallace (58–63) has examined the complex interplay of public policies such as “planned shrinkage” with HIV epidemic dynamics in the Bronx, documenting the “synergy of plagues” that has accompanied rapid social change and the destruction of essential protective networks in poor communities. Using AIDS surveillance data, ecologic studies conducted in various US cities have also consistently found significant associations between income and poverty measures and neighborhood-level AIDS incidence and prevalence rates, and these findings have been consistent across census block groups (46), census tracts (64), and zip codes (65, 66). Length of survival an AIDS has also been with neighborhood measures of income and the of highly a of health at the population may also a role in shaping HIV/AIDS patterns, associations between HIV/AIDS and income at the neighborhood have not been well segregation by race/ethnicity is neighborhood-level that may an important role in HIV/AIDS may affect infectious disease patterns through the and isolation of persons in one increasing the probability of transmission within that For example, found that measures of residential isolation were protective for at risk of disease. Indirect effects of segregation are associated with of neighborhood and with for those in poor neighborhoods segregation may to understanding disease we of studies examining neighborhood segregation in relation to HIV/AIDS that have been The physical environment of neighborhoods has also been examined in relation to infectious disease. et al. examined gonorrhea and neighborhood physical environment in New by using an of physical to explore and to this the of physical such as and a in social in a of community this concept to public et al. found a significant between neighborhood physical and gonorrhea rates, a by a ecologic study of US physical environment may HIV risk by illicit drug use such as injection behaviors and of the mechanisms through which the observed associations may be and associations between the physical environment and HIV/AIDS is research is to support the design of neighborhood-level HIV/AIDS interventions. has differences are not result from social and economic by policies. are and to p. The of evidence ecologic associations between neighborhood-level factors and infectious disease that to be to identify of and defined social as of social structures that that is the of that in its not be p. Social may affect health through 1) the of 2) access to services and 3) of in a and 4) participation, to policies that are more to published studies have explicitly examined social in the of HIV/AIDS. In the and examined income and social as of STD and AIDS found social to be the of STD and AIDS In et al. examined one of social participation, as a for understanding community influences on HIV infection. found that in of and was in other social groups groups with high of social HIV risk. findings from these studies are and We identified categories of factors to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: structural and the and and Each is in the that highlights a of by often and forces that through as is more the the of p. is in patterns of on sexual and HIV A of how structural might influence HIV/AIDS risk is presented in 2. The and uses of race/ethnicity in epidemiologic research have been the of analysis and Social epidemiologists race/ethnicity as an of social forces than physical has that race/ethnicity is a for exposure to which may be defined as the and individual that and of p. The study of disease is of central importance in the study of HIV/AIDS In the for example, the of HIV HIV/AIDS and of also high HIV/AIDS with of behavioral risk factors at the individual have not observed HIV/AIDS or STD by race/ethnicity individual pathways by which HIV/AIDS in a group complex of economic and social patterns, of illicit and health Social epidemiology is and evidence as to what factors and these HIV/AIDS and found that sexual networks for in sexually transmitted infection in the National Health and Social et al. found that risk network structure in a of injection drug users in differences in HIV prevalence between and and structural factors key in shaping the patterns that to HIV/AIDS For example, the effects of sex from the of men may be relationships and sexual segregation by race/ethnicity also to shape social and risk networks in ways that to disease patterns. residential segregation was and associated with gonorrhea at the in the patterns might be observed for HIV/AIDS. is in the proportion of women among HIV/AIDS cases the for of HIV-positive in through and for of HIV-positive in HIV infections in women are at an and women are and more to HIV infection. theoretical for understanding in HIV/AIDS have been including and human beyond as a risk these approaches structural for in HIV/AIDS. focus has been on women in the of sex or transmission women HIV from their partner and reducing acquisition of HIV among men is key to reducing the spread of HIV to women the of and and than their male partners upon of HIV-positive in of of and HIV risks by women The effects of include individual to HIV and a of to HIV prevention The for and Prevention estimates that one of those with HIV not their HIV and have central in shaping to HIV/AIDS the effects of these social forces on the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS have not been well has been examined at the individual in studies of and and to of and in a that the of to p. et al. have defined as and that are at to have AIDS or HIV and at the and communities with which these are p. and have that a conceptual framework for understanding is our of and to as social that can be in relation to broader of and p. in et al. that HIV transmission and with AIDS the of or structural interventions change the in which and communities HIV infection The effective have been those in which communities have to and by increasing community of HIV Social interventions to and to affect community The for this is found in diffusion which on social networks, opinion and change these are by cultural through the in social networks within communities are essential for and behavior change to to HIV/AIDS structures refer to as well as to the and with their and et al. that laws can affect health in 1) may be a through which social determinants affect health direct and 2) may to social conditions associated with health outcomes indirect of direct effects of on HIV risk are on access to injection which have been associated with HIV incidence of an indirect of structures is the of laws on income which may social conditions that increase HIV vulnerability. key social determinants of HIV/AIDS, including poverty and income and community social change may affect HIV/AIDS patterns through population and and the and structures of Each of these factors may be as modifying between and persons in populations. the HIV infection than populations, of HIV prevalence in the or and may affect HIV transmission studies of have into 1) studies of the spread of HIV along and 2) studies of the that vulnerability to HIV/AIDS can the spread of HIV subtypes and to patterns of and evidence linking patterns and Beyrer et al. (14) found that distinct HIV subtypes were associated with different illicit drug trafficking routes in Southeast Asia. has to the spread of HIV in India, and In addition, studies have identified the importance of in the of for HIV/AIDS is a classic of an health have examined the role of in population HIV/AIDS patterns that might for the effects of on HIV/AIDS patterns include sexual and drug use patterns to in patterns, and of and persons, and on the health sex that men have also been associated with high HIV/AIDS prevalence at the This ecologic is to be by the effects of cultural at the local of the effects might have on and network patterns. the of resources in the public and and the environment a central role in the and of HIV/AIDS epidemics. of importance to HIV/AIDS include health social and illicit drug HIV/AIDS is a high on the health of and policies are to be contributing to increasing HIV/AIDS The complex and between policies and HIV/AIDS are to be policies affect health and by poverty in the distribution of and health have that structural designed to and in have a on the HIV/AIDS by increasing and and reducing in the health and social services as to how policies can be designed to to in HIV/AIDS Structural-level health policies and can to in HIV/AIDS HIV prevention have on individual behavior the of the HIV prevention is with of the for that the social and economic of HIV/AIDS The condom is an exemplary of an effective structural HIV prevention to the environment in which HIV risk behaviors the of may also affect in HIV/AIDS transmission by reducing among HIV-positive Social policies a critical role in the of those to HIV/AIDS, such as or Social policies such as and public affect access to resources and can also affect HIV transmission and access to quantitative research has social change to population health outcomes qualitative research has the importance of social in shaping risk In for example, et al. the effects of the and of which Social and Social on the basis of drug and in this study into the drug of income of and in behaviors in an to HIV to studies of the associations between social policies and HIV/AIDS are to the human of policies of with the of those to HIV/AIDS and to identify drug also has a significant on HIV/AIDS. drug particularly of is HIV epidemics in the The on has focused on to the of which of prevention and measures policies for those trafficking or illicit have in of persons for drug The direct of patterns to be For example, et al. found that on policies such as the of and of those with use from Social were associated with in is a risk factor for HIV risk behaviors have been shown to associated with of and HIV risk of in have access to can increase HIV/AIDS risk and by social and risk networks, or and increasing poverty and social in in risk behaviors in of have been For example, et al. found that the in was associated with among injection drug users in of the of heroin trafficking from In the of the of has also been associated with HIV/AIDS forces are often and of men from In a study for the found that a in the size of the from to as a proportion of population reduce HIV among by 1 to the of in are to reduce HIV in with HIV/AIDS prevention and for The of social epidemiology to the HIV/AIDS have in This is in to a that from a that risk factors for disease to one that the that patterns of disease in p. and methodological in the have this our understanding of multiple causes of risk in modeling geographic and databases linking public health data with on social factors enhance our to and in ways that more closely the of HIV/AIDS epidemics. social epidemiology research in HIV/AIDS determine how we can design more effective of interventions at multiple of social A number of key which of the larger social environment in HIV/AIDS transmission and disease are model complex and be has these include data variables and of analysis at multiple contextual effects, and complex with and p. approaches are for the effective of social-level interventions. persons are with HIV/AIDS, and an HIV infections in effective are high drug and in are to of an HIV more These the to underlying social and structural determinants of HIV/AIDS through policies and This was by from the National Institute on The of the New York of for for and A framework for the social epidemiology of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome The the the nature of the between of In are between factors at that to observed epidemic patterns. sexually transmitted infection. 2. through which various of structural might influence the risk of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency

Epidemiologic Reviews · meta-analysis · 394 citationsread the source →

Estimated Reductions in Opioid Overdose Deaths With Sustainment of Public Health Interventions in 4 US States.

Importance: In 2021, more than 80 000 US residents died from an opioid overdose. Public health intervention initiatives, such as the Helping to End Addiction Long-term (HEALing) Communities Study (HCS), are being launched with the goal of reducing opioid-related overdose deaths (OODs). Objective: To estimate the change in the projected number of OODs under different scenarios of the duration of sustainment of interventions, compared with the status quo. Design, setting, and participants: This decision analytical model simulated the opioid epidemic in the 4 states participating in the HCS (ie, Kentucky, Massachusetts, New York, and Ohio) from 2020 to 2026. Participants were a simulated population transitioning from opioid misuse to opioid use disorder (OUD), overdose, treatment, and relapse. The model was calibrated using 2015 to 2020 data from the National Survey on Drug Use and Health, the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and other sources for each state. The model accounts for reduced initiation of medications for OUD (MOUDs) and increased OODs during the COVID-19 pandemic. Exposure: Increasing MOUD initiation by 2- or 5-fold, improving MOUD retention to the rates achieved in clinical trial settings, increasing naloxone distribution efforts, and furthering safe opioid prescribing. An initial 2-year duration of interventions was simulated, with potential sustainment for up to 3 additional years. Main outcomes and measures: Projected reduction in number of OODs under different combinations and durations of sustainment of interventions. Results: Compared with the status quo, the estimated annual reduction in OODs at the end of the second year of interventions was 13% to 17% in Kentucky, 17% to 27% in Massachusetts, 15% to 22% in New York, and 15% to 22% in Ohio. Sustaining all interventions for an additional 3 years was estimated to reduce the annual number of OODs at the end of the fifth year by 18% to 27% in Kentucky, 28% to 46% in Massachusetts, 22% to 34% in New York, and 25% to 41% in Ohio. The longer the interventions were sustained, the better the outcomes; however, these positive gains would be washed out if interventions were not sustained. Conclusions and relevance: In this decision analytical model study of the opioid epidemic in 4 US states, sustained implementation of interventions, including increased delivery of MOUDs and naloxone supply, was found to be needed to reduce OODs and prevent deaths from increasing again.

JAMA network open · 32 citationsread the source →

Shared genetic contributions to pathological gambling and major depression in men.

Context: Although pathological gambling (PG) and major depression (MD) frequently co-occur, little is known regarding the relative contributions of environmental and genetic factors to the codevelopment of the disorders. Objectives: To estimate environmental and genetic contributions to PG and MD as defined in DSM-III-R and the lifetime co-occurrence of PG and MD. Design: Survey data from the Vietnam Era Twin Registry were examined in biometric models. Setting: Telephone interview. Participants: Of 10, 253 eligible participants, 7869 were successfully interviewed. Main outcome measures: Estimated genetic, shared environmental, and unique environmental contributions to PG and MD and their lifetime co-occurrence in bivariate models. Results: Elevated odds ratios for MD were associated with those of PG (4.06; 95% confidence interval, 2.68-6.13), and the association remained significant following adjustment for sociodemographic and other psychiatric variables (odds ratio = 1.98; 95% confidence interval, 1.14-3.45). The best-fitting bivariate model indicated that 66% of the variance in PG and 41% of the variance in MD were owing to genetic factors, and 34% of the variance in PG and 59% of the variance in MD were owing to unique environmental factors. There was a substantial correlation between the genetic components of PG and MD (r(A) = 0.58), with 34% of the genetic variance for each disorder also contributing to that of the other. The best-fitting model estimated that 100% of the total overlap between PG and MD was genetic. Conclusions: The correlation between PG and MD in middle-aged men appears to be largely influenced by overlapping genetic factors. Future research is needed to determine the extent to which these findings extend to other groups (eg, women), identify specific genes, and generate improved prevention and treatment strategies.

Archives of general psychiatry · cohort or longitudinal · 86 citationsread the source →

Unfractionated heparin for second trimester placental insufficiency: a pilot randomized trial.

Objective: To conduct a pilot randomized controlled trial of unfractionated heparin (UFH) in women considered at high risk of placental insufficiency in the second trimester. Methods: Women with either false-positive first trimester (pregnancy-associated placental protein-A [PAPP-A] < 0.35 MoM) or second trimester (alpha-fetoprotein [AFP] > 2.0 MoM, inhibin > 3.0 MoM, human chorionic gonadotropin > 4.0 MoM) serum screening tests or medical/obstetric risk factors were screened for placental insufficiency by sonographic evaluation of the placenta and uterine artery Doppler between 18 and 22 weeks. Thrombophilia screen-negative women with two or three abnormal test categories were randomized by 23+6 weeks to self-administration of subcutaneous unfractionated heparin (UFH) 7500 IU twice daily until birth or 34 weeks, or to standard care. Maternal anxiety and other maternal-infant outcomes were determined. Results: Thirty-two out of 41 eligible women consented, with 16 women randomized to UFH and 16 to standard care. There was no statistically significant difference identified between the two treatment groups (standard care vs. UFH) for the following: maternal anxiety score (mean [standard deviation]), 14.2 [± 1.6] vs. 14.0 [± 1.8]; birth weight (median [range]), 1795 [470-3295]g vs. 1860 [730-3050]g; perinatal death, 3 vs. 0; severe preeclampsia, 2 vs. 6; placental weight < 10th percentile, 7 vs. 4; or placental infarction, 4 vs. 3. Conclusion: Our study design identified women at high risk of adverse maternal-infant outcomes attributable to placental insufficiency. Women with evidence of placental insufficiency were willing to undergo randomization and self-administration of UFH without increased maternal anxiety.

Journal of thrombosis and haemostasis : JTH · randomised controlled trial · 23 citationsread the source →

A double-blind, randomized clinical trial comparing soybean oil-based versus olive oil-based lipid emulsions in adult medical-surgical intensive care unit patients requiring parenteral nutrition.

Objective: Parenteral nutrition has been associated with metabolic and infectious complications in intensive care unit patients. The underlying mechanism for the high risk of complications is not known but may relate to the proinflammatory effects of soybean oil-based lipid emulsions, the only Food and Drug Administration-approved lipid formulation for clinical use. Design: Prospective, double-blind, randomized, controlled trial. Setting: Medical-surgical intensive care units from a major urban teaching hospital and a tertiary referral university hospital. Patients: Adult medical-surgical intensive care unit patients. Intervention: Parenteral nutrition containing soybean oil-based (Intralipid) or olive oil-based (ClinOleic) lipid emulsions. Measurements: Differences in hospital clinical outcomes (nosocomial infections and noninfectious complications), hospital length of stay, glycemic control, inflammatory and oxidative stress markers, and granulocyte and monocyte functions between study groups. Results: A total of 100 patients were randomized to either soybean oil-based parenteral nutrition or olive oil-based parenteral nutrition for up to 28 days. A total of 49 patients received soybean oil-based parenteral nutrition (age 51 ± 15 yrs, body mass index 27 ± 6 kg/m2, and Acute Physiology and Chronic Health Evaluation II score 15.5 ± 7 [±SD]), and a total of 51 patients received olive oil-based lipid emulsion in parenteral nutrition (age 46 ± 19 yrs, body mass index 27 ± 8 kg/m2, and Acute Physiology and Chronic Health Evaluation II score 15.1 ± 6 [±SD]) for a mean duration of 12.9 ± 8 days. The mean hospital blood glucose concentration during parenteral nutrition was 129 ± 14 mg/dL, without differences between groups. Patients treated with soybean oil-based and olive oil-based parenteral nutrition had a similar length of stay (47 ± 47 days and 41 ± 36 days, p = .49), mortality (16.3% and 9.8%, p = .38), nosocomial infections (43% vs. 57%, p = .16), and acute renal failure (26% vs. 18%, p = .34). In addition, there were no differences in inflammatory and oxidative stress markers or in granulocyte and monocyte functions between groups. Conclusion: The administration of parenteral nutrition containing soybean oil-based and olive oil-based lipid emulsion resulted in similar rates of infectious and noninfectious complications and no differences in glycemic control, inflammatory and oxidative stress markers, and immune function in critically ill adults.

Critical care medicine · randomised controlled trial · 43 citationsread the source →

Long-term quality-of-life outcomes after radical prostatectomy or watchful waiting: the Scandinavian Prostate Cancer Group-4 randomised trial.

Background: For men with localised prostate cancer, surgery provides a survival benefit compared with watchful waiting. Treatments are associated with morbidity. Results for functional outcome and quality of life are rarely reported beyond 10 years and are lacking from randomised settings. We report results for quality of life for men in the Scandinavian Prostate Cancer Group Study Number 4 (SPCG-4) after a median follow-up of more than 12 years. Methods: All living Swedish and Finnish men (400 of 695) randomly assigned to radical prostatectomy or watchful waiting in SPCG-4 from 1989 to 1999 were included in our analysis. An additional 281 men were included in a population-based control group matched for region and age. Physical symptoms, symptom-induced stress, and self-assessed quality of life were evaluated with a study-specific questionnaire. Longitudinal data were available for 166 Swedish men who had answered quality-of-life questionnaires at an earlier timepoint. Findings: 182 (88%) of 208 men in the radical prostatectomy group, 167 (87%) of 192 men in the watchful-waiting group, and 214 (76%) of 281 men in the population-based control group answered the questionnaire. Men in SPCG-4 had a median follow-up of 12·2 years (range 7-17) and a median age of 77·0 years (range 61-88). High self-assessed quality of life was reported by 62 (35%) of 179 men allocated radical prostatectomy, 55 (34%) of 160 men assigned to watchful waiting, and 93 (45%) of 208 men in the control group. Anxiety was higher in the SPCG-4 groups (77 [43%] of 178 and 69 [43%] of 161 men) than in the control group (68 [33%] of 208 men; relative risk 1·42, 95% CI 1·07-1·88). Prevalence of erectile dysfunction was 84% (146 of 173 men) in the radical prostatectomy group, 80% (122 of 153) in the watchful-waiting group, and 46% (95 of 208) in the control group and prevalence of urinary leakage was 41% (71 of 173), 11% (18 of 164), and 3% (six of 209), respectively. Distress caused by these symptoms was reported significantly more often by men allocated radical prostatectomy than by men assigned to watchful waiting. In a longitudinal analysis of men in SPCG-4 who provided information at two follow-up points 9 years apart, 38 (45%) of 85 men allocated radical prostatectomy and 48 (60%) of 80 men allocated watchful waiting reported an increase in number of physical symptoms; 50 (61%) of 82 and 47 (64%) of 74 men, respectively, reported a reduction in quality of life. Interpretation: For men in SPCG-4, negative side-effects were common and added more stress than was reported in the control population. In the radical prostatectomy group, erectile dysfunction and urinary leakage were often consequences of surgery. In the watchful-waiting group, side-effects can be caused by tumour progression. The number and severity of side-effects changes over time at a higher rate than is caused by normal ageing and a loss of sexual ability is a persistent psychological problem for both interventions. An understanding of the patterns of side-effects and time dimension of their occurrence for each treatment is important for full patient information. Funding: US National Institutes of Health; Swedish Cancer Society; Foundation in Memory of Johanna Hagstrand and Sigfrid Linnér.

The Lancet. Oncology · randomised controlled trial · 277 citationsread the source →

Prediction and prevention of schizophrenia: what has been achieved and where to go next?

Since the traditional clinical paradigm has been replaced by the modern molecular one, medicine set off into new directions. “Prediction”, “prevention” and “personalization” are the programmatic key words of this new approach. Like other medical disciplines, psychiatry has broadened its focus from diagnosis and treatment to the detection and estimation of the risk of disease development, the prediction of its onset and strategies to avoid its manifestation 1,2,3,4. Although treatment of schizophrenia has greatly advanced over the last decades, a significant number of patients continue to take an unfavorable chronic course 5,6. This makes schizophrenia the leading cause for permanent occupational disability among people under 40 years of age in Germany 7, and the 8th most common cause for disability adjusted life years (DALYs) lost among the 15 to 34-year olds worldwide 8, despite its low prevalence. Moreover, schizophrenia involves tremendous direct and indirect societal costs 9 and a huge burden on patients and their families 8,10. It is becoming increasingly clear that schizophrenia is a complex disorder with polygenic heredity and that its pathogenesis is greatly influenced by interactions between different genes and between genes and environment. Associations to variants of the genes for dysbindin and neuregulin-1, the genetic locus G72 and the DAOA (D-amino acid oxidase activator) gene have now been repeatedly confirmed. As with all other complex diseases, research is focusing now on characterizing the polygenetic predisposition and clarifying its influence on the development of the phenotype 11. Research methods range from molecular genetics via proteome research to cell biology, neurophysiology, brain structural and functional imaging and neuropsychology. With all these methods, several indicators for an increased risk of schizophrenia have been identified. However, the currently recognized neurobiological risk factors are not sufficiently predictive to allow the development and application of “selective” prevention measures targeting asymptomatic persons at risk. For neuro-psychological risk factors, this has just become evident in the large-scale attempt of the North American Prodrome Longitudinal Study (NAPLS) group to improve their multivariate model by integrating the examined neurocognitive variables 12. There are also established environmental risk factors for schizophrenia, such as pregnancy or birth complications, growing up in a large city, IQ low but normal and drug consumption. However, with odds ratios around 2, each of these factors appears to increase the lifetime risk of the disease only slightly 13. Thus, the currently known risk factors, either alone or taken together, cannot be used for prediction and prevention without knowledge of the complete predispositional basis and the gene-gene and gene-environment interactions, which are probably numerous. In view of this situation, it may be argued that the current efforts towards prediction and prevention are still premature and that further progress of etiological research is needed. However, a different perspective has emerged from the work of the centers for early recognition and prevention, established first in Melbourne, Australia and in Cologne, Germany in the mid 1990s, and later on in many other places around the world. This resulted from retrospective research of the early course of psychosis, in which the pathophysiologically active disturbances in brain development extend beyond early abnormalities in behavior into psychopathologically definable early risk and ultra high risk (UHR) symptoms, depending on the individual combination of stressors and resilience factors. First episode psychosis (FEP) research has shown that the outbreak of the disease is preceded in about 70% to nearly 100% of cases by an initial prodrome, which lasts for an average of five to six years. Even in highly developed health care systems, an average of one year thereafter elapses from the first manifestation of psychotic positive symptoms to the initiation of adequate treatment 14,15. The period over which the FEP remains untreated (duration of untreated psychosis, DUP) correlates with: delayed and incomplete remission of the symptoms; necessity of more protracted treatment and greater risk of relapse; lower compliance, greater burden on the family, and a higher level of “expressed emotion”; increased risk of depression and suicide; greater impact on the individual's employment or education; increased drug abuse and delinquent behavior; markedly increased costs of treatment 16. These correlations have recently been confirmed by a meta-analysis 17, with coefficients ranging from 0.285 to 0.434 (95% CI). This does not only provide strong arguments in favor of treating the FEP as early as possible, but has also led to a systematic effort to decrease the incidence of psychosis through indicated prevention. Two important studies concerning the early stage prior to the conversion to FEP have demonstrated that the earliest and most common symptoms, which generally dominate during the prodrome, are unspecific and cannot be distinguished from impairment in mood, drive, contact, and concentration of depressive episodes. These are the Age-Beginning-Course (ABC) study of schizophrenia, a retrospective study with optimized methods 14, and the Cologne Early Recognition (CER) Study, a long-term prospective study with an average follow-up period just below 10 years 18. These studies also found striking cognitive impairments in the form of self-experienced disturbances in thought, speech, and perception processes. This subgroup of so-called basic symptoms, which were found in more than a quarter of patients, had high specificity and a high positive predictive power, accompanied by only low rates of false positive predictions 19,20,21. Basic symptoms were first operationalized in the Bonn Scale for the Assessment of Basic Symptoms (BSABS). Shorter versions of the scale for adults and for children and adolescents — the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Adult version (SPI-A) and the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Child and Youth version (SPI-CY) — were later developed from dimensional analyses 22,23,24. While the BSABS only allows an assessment of the current state, the SPI-A and the SPI-CY also allow severity ratings according to the maximum frequency of occurrence within the past 3 months. In the CER study, 385 patients who were presumably in the prodromal phase of schizophrenia were followed up for an average of 9.6 (±7.6) years past baseline. Twenty percent of the initial criterion-positive cases (1 of 66 basic symptoms) who agreed to be followed up developed schizophrenia after 12 months, a further 17% after 24 months, a further 13% after 36 months, and finally a total of 70% after an average of 4.5 years. Thus, only 30% did not convert to schizophrenia. The overall presence/absence of at least one basic symptom correctly predicted presence/absence of a subsequent transition to schizophrenia in 78.1% of cases. From further analyses, two partially overlapping basic symptom criteria for defining at risk mental states (ARMS) for psychosis, primarily schizophrenia, were developed (Table 1). The first criterion, which consists of ten cognitive-perceptive basic symptoms and is abbreviated as COPER, was based on findings concerning the predictive accuracy of individual basic symptoms 18,25. The second was based on a methodological re-analysis of the same data set, in which a cluster of nine cognitive basic symptoms had repeatedly been selected as the most predictive. This cluster was called “cognitive disturbances” (COGDIS). In terms of general predictive accuracy, the two criteria slightly differed in the CER study, as COGDIS tended to be more conservative than COPER, i.e. to perform better in ruling in subsequent schizophrenia at the cost of performing worse in ruling it out. The transition rate throughout the average follow-up period of roughly 10 years was 65% for COPER and 79% for COGDIS, with the majority of transitions occurring within the first 3 years past baseline. In a second prospective study 26, conducted with the SPI-A and with a systematic follow-up of 24 months, 38% of the initially included 146 at-risk subjects developed a frank psychosis, mainly schizophrenia, within 12.3 (±10.4) months on average (1–48; median=9) according to COPER. Thus, the positive results of the CER study were confirmed. Again, COGDIS appeared to be more specific but less sensitive than COPER. As a consequence of these findings, predictive basic symptoms have been established as a set of criteria for risk assessment in international research on the early recognition of psychosis. In particular, the German Research Network on Schizophrenia used these symptoms, together with a combined criterion of functional deterioration and biological risk, in defining an “early at-risk of psychosis state” (ERPS), thereby suggesting a clinical risk staging model (Figure 1). Early and late initial prodromal state: a clinical staging approach The positive symptoms typical of schizophrenia — such as delusions, hallucinations or formal thought disorders — often first appear in an attenuated or transient form during the initial prodromal phase. These symptoms provide a valid prediction of conversion into FEP, particularly in the short term. Warning signs of this sort have been used as ultra-high risk (UHR) criteria 27,28. Notwithstanding their differences across studies, these criteria are generally composed of three alternative elements: attenuated positive symptoms (APS), brief limited intermittent psychotic symptoms (BLIPS), or a combination of one or more risk factors (always including genetic risk) and functional decline within a certain recent period. For the ascertainment of the UHR criteria, the Melbourne group gradually developed a specific instrument, the Comprehensive Assessment of At Risk Mental States (CAARMS) 29. Based on the Australian definition of the UHR criteria, the Structured Interview for Prodromal Syndromes (SIPS), the Scale for Prodromal Syndromes (SOPS) and, subsequently, the Criteria of Prodromal Syndromes (COPS) were developed 30,31. Different UHR-related approaches to an early detection of FEP, particularly schizophrenia, were developed by the Hillside Recognition and Prevention (RAP) program in New York 32 and the Basel Früherkennung von Psychosen (FEPSY) study 33. There have been at least 15 prediction studies using UHR criteria, some of which with large samples 34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41. The 12-month rates of transition into FEP published so far range between approximately 13% and 50%. A substantial variance is even observed with comparable observation periods in the same center 34,35. Yet, as the annual incidence for all forms of psychosis in the general population is only about 0.034% 42, even the lowest conversion rates still indicate a dramatic increase in the relative risk of illness, at least in the help-seeking samples of specialized centers. Table 2 depicts the predictive accuracy measures published so far, with the last five listed studies representing secondary predictor analyses of samples meeting at risk criteria. As a result, in the German Research Network on Schizophrenia, the UHR approach was combined with the basic symptom approach and applied in a slightly modified form for the definition of “late at-risk of psychosis state” (LRPS) (Figure 1). This clinical staging model, which suggests a syndromal sequence for the development of FEP progressing from unspecific prodromal symptoms to predictive basic symptoms, and then to APS, to BLIPS and to full-blown psychotic symptoms, was recently strongly supported 15. Universal or selective prevention measures target healthy population groups or clinically still healthy risk carriers, respectively 43. Indicated prevention, instead, targets individuals with basic symptoms and UHR symptoms. Even at the early stages when these individuals seek advice and help at the early recognition and prevention centers, they must be regarded as ill and in need of treatment. Furthermore, the impending deterioration of psychosocial performance in schizophrenia often already occurs in the initial prodromal phase, even prior to the conversion into FEP 14,15. These clinical and psychosocial impairments justify defining the interventions in EPRS and LPRS as indicated prevention, pursuing the following three objectives: a) improvement in the current burden of prodromal symptoms; b) avoidance or perhaps delay in the development of psychosocial handicap; c) prevention of or at least delay or attenuation of psychosis. Five international intervention studies have attempted to find out whether or to what extent these three objectives can be reached 44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51 (Table 3). The preventive measures used were either cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), adapted to the requirements of the persons at risk, or atypical antipsychotics (risperidone, olanzapine, and amisulpride). These were randomized controlled studies, but there were problems with the blinding condition in the two CBT interventions. This and other methodological shortcomings currently limit conclusions and have encouraged the research groups working in this area to set up new, optimized intervention studies. For example, the protocol of the ongoing parallel group PREVENT study includes careful comparative analyses and superiority and inferiority tests of the psychological and pharmacological treatments 52. A staging of risk, thereby implying a temporal dimension, was considered for the first time in the two intervention studies of the German Research Network on Schizophrenia. One of these studies covered ERPS and only offered CBT as a preventive measure 49,50. The other study was designed for LRPS and used only preventive treatment with amisul-pride 51. When the symptom development in the initial prodromal state follows the sequence shown in Figure 1, it would be beneficial for scientific and especially ethical reasons to focus on psychological interventions in ERPS, which are well tolerated and highly accepted. As soon as the first attenuated or transient psychotic symptoms occur, it seems justifiable to apply well tolerated antipsychotics with few side effects. This differential prevention strategy is now pursued in all German early recognition centers and is also increasingly gaining support in other countries. Another pharmacological option is aripiprazole, tested in a pilot study in UHR states 53. Its possible preventive effects are currently being analyzed in the PREVENT study. Antidepressants were used in a naturalistic, non-randomized observational study of an adolescent sample employing only the APS criterion for inclusion, but, for methodological reasons, this study does not allow any conclusion about differential preventive effects of these medications 54. A critical evaluation of the achievements over the past 15 years through continuous efforts to enhance prediction and prevention of psychoses, particularly of schizophrenia, reveals quite impressive results. However, the results achieved thus far need to be evaluated in the light of the ambitious, initially mentioned objectives of modern predictive and preventive medicine. Once predictive basic symptoms and UHR symptoms have occurred, the underlying pathophysiological process might have already progressed. For such a complex disease with a long-term course and a pre-dispositional basis, this kind of risk identification and risk-oriented prevention may possibly come too late. A more substantial reduction in incidence could be reached with selective and universal prevention measures. Therefore, symptom-based prediction and prevention need to be further developed into the direction of selective prevention for symptom-free risk carriers. In the future, it is necessary to strive for: a) an improvement of risk enrichment with the inclusion of biological risk factors; b) a stronger individualization of the risk estimation by stratification; c) the inclusion of sub-psychotic mental states, as cross-sectionally by current at risk criteria, in the the application of prevention strategies more with the of the the initial prodromal phase for as as then most of the follow-up periods shown in Table 2 are not to the transition A significant number of later may be as and, the predictive of the risk may be 12. Therefore, the first and most important is to out new, optimized large-scale studies with follow-up periods the of the initial prodromal phase, as in the CER study 18. The risk enrichment can also be advanced through the inclusion of following the of recent research on the prediction of through the cognitive impairment This condition a risk for with a conversion rate comparable to the risk for the patients certain imaging and the predictive risk enrichment may be possible for using brain but also impairments of and which are with the psychosis risk and are more and in cases with a later transition to schizophrenia and other new large-scale studies with sufficiently observation periods could whether the risk enrichment can be achieved by of such The of this strategy is on the progress of research on biological and environmental risk factors and their interactions, as is currently attempted in the Network of schizophrenia study In other medical disciplines, such as or a risk which does not in a of is using for multivariate clinical staging by risk In the of study, this approach was into psychosis prediction research for the first time A clinical model was developed based on a including six variables positive disturbances Assessment of in the past and years of Based on the individual a multivariate for further the risk of transition to psychosis into risk was each a increased relative risk to the general with each This model was argued to improve the prediction of psychosis by a of the individual risk in terms of and a more risk estimation or clinical staging of risk, in studies, could the development of risk adapted inclusion criteria for randomized preventive In the first application of this approach in the only clinical and variables were It remains to be whether a model including or environmental variables would increase the predictive accuracy even In studies have to whether such can also be applied to the prediction of psychosis within different time The currently ongoing of the has a about the inclusion of a risk for psychosis in to prevention initially argued this and to the that the application of as criteria could that the high rate of predictions in would be to increase up to in general This is and prior to whether to the in the of the The on the predictive of at risk criteria, thereby the persons meeting at risk criteria already from mental and functional for which they seek Moreover, they psychological and cognitive with and functional the majority of help-seeking at risk persons general criteria for mental disorder a clinically significant behavioral or psychological with disability and have to be considered as i.e. as people with the need and to be these in there are reasons for the inclusion of a clinical in the as by current at risk criteria, not as a prodromal risk for first psychosis, but as an to medical the of such an diagnosis would have the of the by the current mental state to a and Although an increased risk of psychosis would continue to be a of such a the psychological and medical focus would be from an to and At this current state of the criteria would be the for the inclusion of this A for the and of a new of international and studies would be with this inclusion in and later on also in A new prevention approach is by the of and studies a of the onset of psychosis the with the first results are for and The transition rate was lower in an group of UHR adolescents than in a group and this was at a an was evaluated in 10 patients in an pilot and a significant improvement in different was In an study, time was in an UHR group with as with a group suggesting a of This was the first study imaging data on effects in individuals at risk. The preventive of is currently in the process of in the Australian Prodrome study With the of schizophrenia is the first mental disorder to which the prediction and prevention program of modern medicine has been The results are and justify the that in the years to come it be possible to provide preventive strategies to the individual risk of of each In to a reduction in risk assessment has to be by neurobiological and psychosocial risk factors, and indicated prevention has to be further developed towards selective prevention. This a new of large sample studies for prediction as well as prevention, with observation In these studies, of risk selected to predictive must be psychological and pharmacological interventions need to be on a long-term basis, more prevention strategies have to be In to be to and such studies, it would be to mental states, as by the currently used risk symptoms, in the of the

World Psychiatry · 127 citationsread the source →

Hand Posturing Is a Nonverbal Indicator of Catastrophic Thinking for Finger, Hand, or Wrist Injury.

Background: Prior research documents that greater psychologic distress (anxiety/depression) and less effective coping strategies (catastrophic thinking, kinesophobia) are associated with greater pain intensity and greater limitations. Recognition and acknowledgment of verbal and nonverbal indicators of psychologic factors might raise opportunities for improved psychologic health. There is evidence that specific patient words and phrases indicate greater catastrophic thinking. This study tested proposed nonverbal indicators (such as flexion of the wrist during attempted finger flexion or extension of uninjured fingers as the stiff and painful finger is flexed) for their association with catastrophic thinking. Questions/purposes: (1) Do patients with specific protective hand postures during physical examination have greater pain interference (limitation of activity in response to nociception), limitations, symptoms of depression, catastrophic thinking (protectiveness, preparation for the worst), and kinesophobia (fear of movement)? (2) Do greater numbers of protective hand postures correlate with worse scores on these measures? Methods: Between October 2014 and September 2016, 156 adult patients with stiff or painful fingers within 2 months after sustaining a finger, hand, or wrist injury were invited to participate in this study. Six patients chose not to participate as a result of time constraints and one patient was excluded as a result of inconsistent scoring of a possible hand posture, leaving 149 patients for analysis. We asked all patients to complete a set of questionnaires and a sociodemographic survey. We used Patient Reported Outcomes Measurement Information System (PROMIS) Depression, Upper Extremity Physical Function, and Pain Interference computer adaptive test (CAT) questionnaires. We used the Abbreviated Pain Catastrophizing Scale (PCS-4) to measure catastrophic thinking in response to nociception. Finally, we used the Tampa Scale of Kinesophobia (TSK) to assess fear of movement. The occurrence of protective hand postures during the physical examination was noted by both the physician and researcher. For uncertainty or disagreement, a video of the physical examination was recorded and a group decision was made. Results: Patients with one or more protective hand postures did not score higher on the PROMIS Pain Interference CAT (hand posture: 59 [56-64]; no posture: 59 [54-63]; difference of medians: 0; p = 0.273), Physical Function CAT (32 ± 8 versus 34 ± 8; mean difference: 2 [confidence interval {CI}, -0.5 to 5]; p = 0.107), nor the Depression CAT (48 [41-55] versus 48 [42-53]; difference of medians: 0; p = 0.662). However, having at least one hand posture was associated with a higher degree of catastrophic thinking (PCS scores: 13 [6-26] versus 10 [3-16]; difference of medians: 3; p = 0.0104) and a higher level of kinesophobia (TSK: 40 ± 6 versus 38 ± 6; mean difference: -2 [CI, -4 to -1]; p = 0.0420). Greater catastrophic thinking was associated with a greater number of protective hand postures on average (rho: 0.20, p = 0.0138). Conclusions: Protective hand postures and (based on prior research) specific words and phrases are associated with catastrophic thinking and kinesophobia, less effective coping strategies that hinder recovery. Surgeons can learn to recognize these signs and begin to treat catastrophic thinking and kinesophobia starting with compassion, empathy, and patience and be prepared to add formal support (such as cognitive-behavioral therapy) to help facilitate recovery. Level of evidence: Level III, diagnostic study.

Clinical orthopaedics and related research · cohort or longitudinal · 35 citationsread the source →

Measuring Advance Care Planning: Optimizing the Advance Care Planning Engagement Survey.

Context: A validated 82-item Advance Care Planning (ACP) Engagement Survey measures a broad range of behaviors. However, concise surveys are needed. Objectives: The objective of this study was to validate shorter versions of the survey. Methods: The survey included 57 process (e.g., readiness) and 25 action items (e.g., discussions). For item reduction, we systematically eliminated questions based on face validity, item nonresponse, redundancy, ceiling effects, and factor analysis. We assessed internal consistency (Cronbach's alpha) and construct validity with cross-sectional correlations and the ability of the progressively shorter survey versions to detect change one week after exposure to an ACP intervention (Pearson correlation coefficients). Results: Five hundred one participants (four Canadian and three US sites) were included in item reduction (mean age 69 years [±10], 41% nonwhite). Because of high correlations between readiness and action items, all action items were removed. Because of high correlations and ceiling effects, two process items were removed. Successive factor analysis then created 55-, 34-, 15-, nine-, and four-item versions; 664 participants (from three US ACP clinical trials) were included in validity analysis (age 65 years [±8], 72% nonwhite, 34% Spanish speaking). Cronbach's alphas were high for all versions (four items 0.84-55 items 0.97). Compared with the original survey, cross-sectional correlations were high (four items 0.85; 55 items 0.97) as were delta correlations (four items 0.68; 55 items 0.93). Conclusion: Shorter versions of the ACP Engagement Survey are valid, internally consistent, and able to detect change across a broad range of ACP behaviors for English and Spanish speakers. Shorter ACP surveys can efficiently measure broad ACP behaviors in research and clinical settings.

Journal of pain and symptom management · cohort or longitudinal · 180 citationsread the source →

Evaluating Long-term Outcomes of NHS Stop Smoking Services (ELONS): a prospective cohort study.

Background: NHS Stop Smoking Services (SSSs) provide free at the point of use treatment for smokers who would like to stop. Since their inception in 1999 they have evolved to offer a variety of support options. Given the changes that have happened in the provision of services and the ongoing need for evidence on effectiveness, the Evaluating Long-term Outcomes for NHS Stop Smoking Services (ELONS) study was commissioned. Objectives: The main aim of the study was to explore the factors that determine longer-term abstinence from smoking following intervention by SSSs. There were also a number of additional objectives. Design: The ELONS study was an observational study with two main stages: secondary analysis of routine data collected by SSSs and a prospective cohort study of service clients. The prospective study had additional elements on client satisfaction, well-being and longer-term nicotine replacement therapy (NRT) use. Setting: The setting for the study was SSSs in England. For the secondary analysis, routine data from 49 services were obtained. For the prospective study and its added elements, nine services were involved. The target population was clients of these services. Participants: There were 202,804 cases included in secondary analysis and 3075 in the prospective study. Interventions: A combination of behavioural support and stop smoking medication delivered by SSS practitioners. Main outcome measures: Abstinence from smoking at 4 and 52 weeks after setting a quit date, validated by a carbon monoxide (CO) breath test. Results: Just over 4 in 10 smokers (41%) recruited to the prospective study were biochemically validated as abstinent from smoking at 4 weeks (which was broadly comparable with findings from the secondary analysis of routine service data, where self-reported 4-week quit rates were 48%, falling to 34% when biochemical validation had occurred). At the 1-year follow-up, 8% of prospective study clients were CO validated as abstinent from smoking. Clients who received specialist one-to-one behavioural support were twice as likely to have remained abstinent than those who were seen by a general practitioner (GP) practice and pharmacy providers [odds ratio (OR) 2.3, 95% confidence interval (CI) 1.2 to 4.6]. Clients who received group behavioural support (either closed or rolling groups) were three times more likely to stop smoking than those who were seen by a GP practice or pharmacy providers (OR 3.4, 95% CI 1.7 to 6.7). Satisfaction with services was high and well-being at baseline was found to be a predictor of abstinence from smoking at longer-term follow-up. Continued use of NRT at 1 year was rare, but no evidence of harm from longer-term use was identified from the data collected. Conclusions: Stop Smoking Services in England are effective in helping smokers to move away from tobacco use. Using the 52-week CO-validated quit rate of 8% found in this study, we estimate that in the year 2012-13 the services supported 36,249 clients to become non-smokers for the remainder of their lives. This is a substantial figure and provides one indicator of the ongoing value of the treatment that the services provide. The study raises a number of issues for future research including (1) examining the role of electronic cigarettes (e-cigarettes) in smoking cessation for service clients [this study did not look at e-cigarette use (except briefly in the longer-term NRT study) but this is a priority for future studies]; (2) more detailed comparisons of rolling groups with other forms of behavioural support; (3) further exploration of the role of practitioner knowledge, skills and use of effective behaviour change techniques in supporting service clients to stop smoking; (4) surveillance of the impact of structural and funding changes on the future development and sustainability of SSSs; and (5) more detailed analysis of well-being over time between those who successfully stop smoking and those who relapse. Further research on longer-term use of non-combustible nicotine products that measures a wider array of biomarkers of smoking-related harm such as lung function tests or carcinogen metabolites. Funding: The National Institute for Health Research Health Technology Assessment programme. The UK Centre for Tobacco and Alcohol Studies provided funding for the longer-term NRT study.

Health technology assessment (Winchester, England) · cohort or longitudinal · 52 citationsread the source →

Healthy lifestyle and life expectancy at age 30 years in the Chinese population: an observational study.

Background: The improvement of life expectancy is one of the aims of the Healthy China 2030 blueprint. We aimed to investigate the extent to which healthy lifestyles are associated with life expectancy in Chinese adults. Methods: We used the prospective China Kadoorie Biobank (CKB) study to examine the relative risk of mortality associated with individual and combined lifestyle factors (never smoking or quitting not for illness, no excessive alcohol use, being physically active, healthy eating habits, and healthy body shape). Participants with coronary heart disease, stroke, cancer, or missing values for body-mass index were excluded. For analysis of chronic respiratory diseases, participants with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease or asthma were excluded. We estimated the national prevalence of lifestyle factors using data from the China Nutrition and Health Surveillance (CNHS; 2015) and derived mortality rates from the Global Burden of Diseases, Injuries, and Risk Factors Study (2015). All three data sources were combined to estimate the life expectancy of individuals at age 30 years following different levels of lifestyle factors by using the life table method. The cause-specific decomposition of the life expectancy differences was analysed using Arriaga's method. Findings: After the exclusion of CKB participants with coronary heart disease, stroke, cancer, or missing BMI data at baseline, 487 209 were included in the primary analysis. Participants with COPD or asthma at baseline were additionally excluded for chronic respiratory disease-related analysis, leaving 451 233 participants with data available for analysis. Data from 171 127 adults aged 30-84 years from the CNHS 2015 were used to estimate the sex-specific and age-specific prevalence of lifestyle-related factors. There were 42 496 deaths documented over a median follow-up of 11·1 years (IQR 10·2-12·1) in CKB. The adjusted hazard ratios (aHRs) of participants adopting five versus 0-1 low-risk factors was 0·38 (95% CI 0·34-0·43) for all-cause mortality, aHR 0·37 (0·30-0·46) for cardiovascular disease mortality, aHR 0·47 (0·39-0·56) for cancer mortality, and aHR 0·30 (0·14-0·64) for chronic respiratory disease mortality. The life expectancy at age 30 years for individuals with 0-1 low-risk factors was on average 41·7 years (95% CI 41·5-42·0) for men and 47·3 years (46·6-48·0) for women. For individuals with all five low-risk factors, the life expectancy at age 30 was 50·5 years (95% CI 48·5-52·4) for men and 55·4 years (53·5-57·4) for women; meaning a difference of 8·8 years (95% CI 6·8-10·7) for men and 8·1 years (6·5-9·9) for women. The estimated extended life expectancy for men and women was mainly attributable to reduced death from cardiovascular disease (2·4 years [27% of the total extended life expectancy] for men and 3·7 years [46%] for women), cancer (2·6 years [30%] for men and 0·9 years [11%] for women), and chronic respiratory disease (0·6 years [7%] for men and 1·2 years [15%] for women). Interpretation: Our findings suggest that increasing the adoption of these five healthy lifestyle factors through public health interventions could be associated with substantial gains in life expectancy in the Chinese population. Funding: National Natural Science Foundation of China, National Key Research and Development Program of China, Kadoorie Charitable Foundation, UK Wellcome Trust.

The Lancet. Public health · cohort or longitudinal · 129 citationsread the source →

Salivary testosterone and a trinucleotide (CAG) length polymorphism in the androgen receptor gene predict amygdala reactivity in men.

In studies employing functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI), reactivity of the amygdala to threat-related sensory cues (viz., facial displays of negative emotion) has been found to correlate positively with interindividual variability in testosterone levels of women and young men and to increase on acute administration of exogenous testosterone. Many of the biological actions of testosterone are mediated by intracellular androgen receptors (ARs), which exert transcriptional control of androgen-dependent genes and are expressed in various regions of the brain, including the amygdala. Transactivation potential of the AR decreases (yielding relative androgen insensitivity) with expansion a polyglutamine stretch in the N-terminal domain of the AR protein, as encoded by a trinucleotide (CAG) repeat polymorphism in exon 1 of the X-chromosome AR gene. Here we examined whether amygdala reactivity to threat-related facial expressions (fear, anger) differs as a function of AR CAG length variation and endogenous (salivary) testosterone in a mid-life sample of 41 healthy men (mean age=45.6 years, range: 34-54 years; CAG repeats, range: 19-29). Testosterone correlated inversely with participant age (r=-0.39, p=0.012) and positively with number of CAG repeats (r=0.45, p=0.003). In partial correlations adjusted for testosterone level, reactivity in the ventral amygdala was lowest among men with largest number of CAG repeats. This inverse association was seen in both the right (r(p)=-0.34, p<0.05) and left (r(p)=-0.32, p<0.05) hemisphere. Activation of dorsal amygdala, correlated positively with individual differences in salivary testosterone, also in right (r=0.40, p<0.02) and left (r=0.32, p<0.05) hemisphere, but was not affected by number of CAG repeats. Hence, androgenic influences on threat-related reactivity in the ventral amygdala may be moderated partially by CAG length variation in the AR gene. Because individual differences in salivary testosterone also predicted dorsal amygdala reactivity and did so independently of CAG repeats, it is suggested that androgenic influences within this anatomically distinct region may be mediated, in part, by non-genomic or AR-independent mechanisms.

Psychoneuroendocrinology · 78 citationsread the source →

Comparison of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor vildagliptin and the sulphonylurea gliclazide in combination with metformin, in Muslim patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus fasting during Ramadan: results of the VECTOR study.

Objective: To compare the incidence of hypoglycaemic events (HEs) in a real-world setting in Muslim patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus fasting during Ramadan. Research design and methods: We performed a ≤16-week prospective, non-interventional, two-cohort study. Data were collected 1-6 weeks before and ≤6 weeks after fasting. Patients were enrolled who had been receiving vildagliptin (50 mg twice daily) or sulphonylurea (SU) as add-on to metformin at least 4 weeks prior to fasting. Main outcome measures: The primary efficacy endpoint was incidence of HEs during the Ramadan fast. Changes in glycated haemoglobin (HbA(1c)) and body weight, as well as adherence to treatment, were also assessed. Results: Seventy-two patients were enrolled (vildagliptin, n = 30; SU, n = 41; no treatment, n = 1), of whom 23 (76.7%) and 36 (87.8%), respectively, completed the study. With vildagliptin, there were no HEs or severe HEs, compared with 34 HEs (15 patients, 41.7%) and one severe (grade 2) HE with SU. The mean between-group difference in the proportion who experienced at least one HE was -41.7% (95%CI -57.8%, -25.6%), p = 0.0002. Vildagliptin lowered mean HbA(1c) from 7.6% (SD 0.9%) at baseline to 7.2% (SD 0.7%) post-Ramadan, whereas SU had no effect (7.2% [SD 0.6%] vs 7.3% [SD 0.7%]; mean between-group difference -0.5% [95% CI -0.9%, -0.1%], p = 0.0262). The mean number of missed doses was markedly lower with vildagliptin (0.2 [SD 0.8] vs 7.6 [SD 14.9]; mean between-group difference -7.4 [95% CI -13.7, -1.20] doses; p = 0.0204). Body weight remained unchanged in both groups. Conclusion: Vildagliptin caused no hypoglycaemia, was well adhered to and improved HbA(1c), making it a suitable treatment option for managing fasting. Study limitations are the sample size and the lack of diet and exercise data. When extrapolated to the global Muslim population with a similar clinical background, these findings could have considerable public health and clinical implications.

Current medical research and opinion · cohort or longitudinal · 56 citationsread the source →

Electronic cigarettes for smoking cessation.

Background: Electronic cigarettes (ECs) are handheld electronic vaping devices which produce an aerosol formed by heating an e-liquid. Some people who smoke use ECs to stop or reduce smoking, but some organizations, advocacy groups and policymakers have discouraged this, citing lack of evidence of efficacy and safety. People who smoke, healthcare providers and regulators want to know if ECs can help people quit and if they are safe to use for this purpose. This is an update conducted as part of a living systematic review. Objectives: To examine the effectiveness, tolerability, and safety of using electronic cigarettes (ECs) to help people who smoke tobacco achieve long-term smoking abstinence. Search methods: We searched the Cochrane Tobacco Addiction Group's Specialized Register, the Cochrane Central Register of Controlled Trials (CENTRAL), MEDLINE, Embase, and PsycINFO to 1 May 2021, and reference-checked and contacted study authors. We screened abstracts from the Society for Research on Nicotine and Tobacco (SRNT) 2021 Annual Meeting.   SELECTION CRITERIA: We included randomized controlled trials (RCTs) and randomized cross-over trials, in which people who smoke were randomized to an EC or control condition. We also included uncontrolled intervention studies in which all participants received an EC intervention. Studies had to report abstinence from cigarettes at six months or longer or data on safety markers at one week or longer, or both. Data collection and analysis: We followed standard Cochrane methods for screening and data extraction. Our primary outcome measures were abstinence from smoking after at least six months follow-up, adverse events (AEs), and serious adverse events (SAEs). Secondary outcomes included the proportion of people still using study product (EC or pharmacotherapy) at six or more months after randomization or starting EC use, changes in carbon monoxide (CO), blood pressure (BP), heart rate, arterial oxygen saturation, lung function, and levels of carcinogens or toxicants or both. We used a fixed-effect Mantel-Haenszel model to calculate risk ratios (RRs) with a 95% confidence interval (CI) for dichotomous outcomes. For continuous outcomes, we calculated mean differences. Where appropriate, we pooled data in meta-analyses. Main results: We included 61 completed studies, representing 16,759 participants, of which 34 were RCTs. Five of the 61 included studies were new to this review update. Of the included studies, we rated seven (all contributing to our main comparisons) at low risk of bias overall, 42 at high risk overall (including all non-randomized studies), and the remainder at unclear risk. There was moderate-certainty evidence, limited by imprecision, that quit rates were higher in people randomized to nicotine EC than in those randomized to nicotine replacement therapy (NRT) (risk ratio (RR) 1.53, 95% confidence interval (CI) 1.21 to 1.93; I2 = 0%; 4 studies, 1924 participants). In absolute terms, this might translate to an additional three quitters per 100 (95% CI 1 to 6). There was low-certainty evidence (limited by very serious imprecision) that the rate of occurrence of AEs was similar (RR 0.98, 95% CI 0.80 to 1.19; I2 = 0%; 2 studies, 485 participants). SAEs were rare, but there was insufficient evidence to determine whether rates differed between groups due to very serious imprecision (RR 1.30, 95% CI 0.89 to 1.90: I2 = 0; 4 studies, 1424 participants). There was moderate-certainty evidence, again limited by imprecision, that quit rates were higher in people randomized to nicotine EC than to non-nicotine EC (RR 1.94, 95% CI 1.21 to 3.13; I2 = 0%; 5 studies, 1447 participants). In absolute terms, this might lead to an additional seven quitters per 100 (95% CI 2 to 16). There was moderate-certainty evidence of no difference in the rate of AEs between these groups (RR 1.01, 95% CI 0.91 to 1.11; I2 = 0%; 3 studies, 601 participants). There was insufficient evidence to determine whether rates of SAEs differed between groups, due to very serious imprecision (RR 1.06, 95% CI 0.47 to 2.38; I2 = 0; 5 studies, 792 participants). Compared to behavioural support only/no support, quit rates were higher for participants randomized to nicotine EC (RR 2.61, 95% CI 1.44 to 4.74; I2 = 0%; 6 studies, 2886 participants). In absolute terms this represents an additional six quitters per 100 (95% CI 2 to 15). However, this finding was of very low certainty, due to issues with imprecision and risk of bias. There was some evidence that non-serious AEs were more common in people randomized to nicotine EC (RR 1.22, 95% CI 1.12 to 1.32; I2 = 41%, low certainty; 4 studies, 765 participants), and again, insufficient evidence to determine whether rates of SAEs differed between groups (RR 1.51, 95% CI 0.70 to 3.24; I2 = 0%; 7 studies, 1303 participants).  Data from non-randomized studies were consistent with RCT data. The most commonly reported AEs were throat/mouth irritation, headache, cough, and nausea, which tended to dissipate with continued use. Very few studies reported data on other outcomes or comparisons, hence evidence for these is limited, with CIs often encompassing clinically significant harm and benefit. Authors' conclusions: There is moderate-certainty evidence that ECs with nicotine increase quit rates compared to NRT and compared to ECs without nicotine. Evidence comparing nicotine EC with usual care/no treatment also suggests benefit, but is less certain. More studies are needed to confirm the effect size. Confidence intervals were for the most part wide for data on AEs, SAEs and other safety markers, with no difference in AEs between nicotine and non-nicotine ECs. Overall incidence of SAEs was low across all study arms. We did not detect  evidence of harm from nicotine EC, but longest follow-up was two years and the  number of studies was small. The main limitation of the evidence base remains imprecision due to the small number of RCTs, often with low event rates, but further RCTs are underway. To ensure the review continues to provide up-to-date information to decision-makers, this review is now a living systematic review. We run searches monthly, with the review updated when relevant new evidence becomes available. Please refer to the Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews for the review's current status.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · systematic review · 106 citationsread the source →

Developmental Coordination Disorder

For the last 100 years, poor motor coordination in children has been recognized as a developmental problem.1 As early as 1937, these children were classified as “clumsy.”1 Since then, other terms such as “motorically awkward,” “motor impaired,” and “physically awkward” have been used to describe these children, and the terms “developmental apraxia” and “perceptual motor difficulties” have been used to characterize this developmental problem.2,3 Since the 1994 International Consensus Conference on Children and Clumsiness, the term “developmental coordination disorder” (DCD) has been used to describe the condition of children with motor incoordination.1,4 The purpose of this article is to provide the following information about DCD: (1) definition, (2) prevalence, (3) etiology, (4) discussion regarding the difficulties in classifying these children, (5) common characteristics, (6) long-term prognosis, and (7) brief review of treatment approaches. Developmental coordination disorder, a chronic and usually permanent condition found in children, is characterized by motor impairment that interferes with the child's activities of daily living and academic achievement.3,5 In order for a child to be diagnosed with DCD, these motor impairments must negatively affect some other aspect of his or her life.6 Impairment alone, however, does not qualify a child for the diagnosis of DCD; the motor impairment must not be caused by or have the symptoms of an identifiable neurological problem.2,5 That is, the child must not have any disturbances of muscle tone (ataxia or spasticity), sensory loss, or involuntary movements. If mental retardation is present, the testable IQ of the child must be greater than 70 and the motor impairments must be greater than what would normally be expected for children with mental retardation.5 Finally, a child diagnosed with DCD must not meet the criteria for a diagnosis of pervasive developmental disorder.6 Developmental coordination disorder appears to be a fairly common disorder of childhood and is usually identified in children between 6 and 12 years of age. Ten years ago, researchers7,8 estimated that DCD occurred in 10% to 19% of school-aged children. With a more precise definition of DCD, the current prevalence is estimated to be between 5% and 8% of all school-aged children,5,9–11 with more boys than girls (2:1) being diagnosed with DCD.12 This difference may reflect higher referral rates for boys, because the behavior of boys with motor incoordination may be more difficult to manage at home and in the classroom.8 In addition, a higher incidence of DCD may be found among children with a history of prenatal or perinatal difficulties.3 Due to the heterogeneity of DCD, finding its cause has been difficult.3 Several theories speculate that the etiology of DCD is part of the continuum of cerebral palsy5,13; is secondary to prenatal, perinatal, or neonatal insult3; or is secondary to neuronal damage at the cellular level in the neurotransmitter or receptor systems.14 Hadders-Algra14 based her view that DCD is a result of damage at the cellular level on evidence that cerebral palsy is often caused by prenatal damage that cannot be identified by current diagnostic techniques. Developmental coordination disorder, a chronic and usually permanent condition found in children, is characterized by motor impairment that interferes with the child’s activities of daily living. Although both standard and nonstandard functional tests are available to identify the specific disabilities experienced by a child with DCD, relating the observed disabilities to the primary impairment(s) or any possible neuropathology is not easily accomplished. The problems experienced by children with DCD are believed to emanate from abnormalities in neurotransmitter or receptor systems rather than from damage to specific groups of neurons or brain regions.15 Children's difficulties with coordination can result from a combination of one or more impairments in proprioception, motor programming, timing, or sequencing of muscle activity. A number of theories have evolved in an attempt to shed light on the specific neuronal processing deficits that contribute to DCD. Current models used to explain the neural regulation of posture and movement during development can serve as a basis for the examination and management of individuals with DCD. Using these models, many of the deficits of motor control observed in these children can be described. A variety of theoretical models exist to explain the role of the nervous system in motor development. Forty years ago, the primitive reflex model was a generally accepted theory used to explain how the brain regulates early motor behavior.16 As development proceeded, the higher centers exerted increasing control over the lower reflexes.16 These earlier models were based on a hierarchy of motor control in which higher centers were capable of planning and executing a motor plan without external or internal feedback from lower centers of the central nervous system (CNS). The more recently proposed systems model suggests a more complex interaction among various levels of the CNS. In the systems model, sensory feedback is interpreted by the CNS, and the appropriate movement strategy is selected based on current experience, the state of the internal and external environment, and memory of similar movements. Edelman's neuronal group selection theory includes aspects of both of these models and proposes that functional groups of neurons exist at all levels of the CNS.17 These neuronal groups are determined by evolution, but their functional integrity is dependent on afferent information produced by movement and experience.17 In this regard, these genetically determined collections of interconnected neurons (neuronal groups) in both cortical and subcortical structures serve as an early repertoire for motor behavior or receipt of specific sensory information.14,17,18 According to neuronal group selection theory, motor development proceeds in 2 phases.15 The first, the phase of primary variability, is characterized by crude and erratic motor activity that does not require sensory information for its initiation or guidance. These self-generated movements give rise to afferent (visual, kinesthetic) inputs that reinforce more specific synaptic connections within each group. An intermediate period in which effective patterns are selected is followed by the secondary variability phase. In this phase, sensory and motor factors interact to establish the intercellular connections that produce the specific and complex muscle contraction patterns that characterize coordinated, goal-directed movement. Reciprocal connections between groups subserving movements in various body parts and representing different parts of visual space are reinforced with each repetition of a particular function. As the more efficient movement patterns are practiced, the appropriate synaptic circuits are reinforced and subsequently established.14,17,19,20 The literature includes a wide variation in terminology and criteria to describe DCD. This variation has made studying the causes of DCD and developing treatment approaches for the child with DCD difficult. In their analysis of clinical trial data, Macnab et al21 identified 5 different subtype profiles of DCD. The first subtype included children with better gross motor than fine motor skills, although both were still below normal while standing balance and visual-perceptual skills were both within normal ranges. Compared with children of the same age with DCD, children in the second subtype scored high on measures of upper-limb speed and dexterity, visuomotor integration, and visual-perception skills, but they demonstrated poor performance on measures of kinesthetic ability (accuracy in discriminating movement and position of the upper limbs) and balance. Children in subtype 3 demonstrated the greatest overall motor involvement and were the only subtype to have difficulty with both kinesthetic and visual skills. Compared with their peers with DCD, children in subtype 4 performed well on kinesthetic tasks but demonstrated poor performance on tasks requiring visual and dexterity skills. Children in subtype 5 demonstrated poor performance on measurements of running speed and agility compared with their peers with DCD; however, they performed well relative to their peers with DCD in the tasks involving visual-perception skills. The development of different classification systems for DCD may have been influenced by the design of motor tests.21 For example, items testing one motor skill may be influenced by a related motor skill (eg, ball-throwing skills cannot be separated from visuomotor skills). In addition, a test may have an over-representation of one skill that could unduly influence the child's performance on the test. For example, having a greater number of items testing gross motor rather than fine motor skills could either positively or negatively influence a child's score, depending on the child's specific strengths and weaknesses. Another difficulty in interpreting the literature on DCD is the lack of inclusion criteria. Geuze et al22 reviewed 164 publications on the study of DCD and found that only 60% of the studies had objective inclusion criteria. Because of this lack of inclusion criteria, Geuze et al recommended that a child scoring below the 15th percentile on standardized tests of motor skills and having an IQ score above 69 would qualify for a diagnosis of DCD. The inconsistency among standardized motor tests used to identify children with DCD is another problem. In one study,5 the Bruininks-Oseretsky Test of Motor Proficiency (BOTMP) and the Movement Assessment Battery for Children (M-ABC) were administered to 157 children with DCD and 155 children with no motor difficulties; the test results were in agreement 82% (kappa=.62) of the time in distinguishing children who had DCD from children who did not have DCD. This is considered a substantial level of agreement.23 In a study of 202 children (101 with DCD and 101 without DCD), the BOTMP and M-ABC agreed only 67% of the time (kappa=.41), which was considered a moderate level of agreement.24 Because the BOTMP and the M-ABC are 2 of the most commonly used tests for identifying children with DCD, the potential lack of agreement by these tests in identifying children who have DCD is a concern. Two primary factors may explain the difference in outcomes between the BOTMP and M-ABC when used to identify children with DCD.24 First, the BOTMP allows the tester to verbally prompt and correct the child during the testing procedure, allowing the child who is dependent on more external controls to do better on the BOTMP. The BOTMP tends to under-identify children with DCD. Second, the M-ABC requires more careful instruction on the part of the examiner and allows more opportunities for the examinee to practice, but does not allow any verbal or physical prompting by the examiner. Children with attention problems may have more difficulty with the careful instructions for the M-ABC. Another difficulty in classifying children with DCD is the overlap with other disorders. Approximately 41% of children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and 56% of children with learning disabilities also have DCD.5,21 Further confusing the classification scheme is that the terms “developmental coordination disorder,” for which no identifiable organic brain damage is present, and “apraxia,” which is caused by identifiable brain damage, have been used interchangeably.3 Children with DCD may have a wide range of dysfunctions. These dysfunctions can be grouped into 3 areas: gross motor, fine motor, and psychosocial. Many children with DCD have neurological soft signs such as hypotonia, persistence of primitive reflexes, and immature balance reactions that interfere with gross motor development.5,25 These children also may demonstrate an awkward running pattern, fall frequently, drop items, and have difficulty imitating body positions and following 2- to 3-step motor commands.8 Because of their gross motor problems, children with DCD also perform poorly in sporting events,2 possibly due, in part, to their slow reaction and movement times.7 Their decreased participation in sports may result in decreased muscle force.8 Difficulty with handwriting or drawing often is the first identifiable sign of a fine motor problem and is the most frequently mentioned motor problem experienced by children with DCD. Children with DCD frequently have difficulty planning and executing other fine motor skills such as gripping and dressing.26–29 Unfortunately, children with DCD may experience problems not limited to fine or gross motor areas. These children also may experience psychosocial problems at school. Children with DCD may have learning disabilities or reading problems and may be at increased risk for lower intelligence.5,8 They may act out in class more than other children,13 may be the class clown, and may exhibit less socially desirable means of gaining recognition and friends.8 Adolescents with DCD have been found to have fewer friends, and they have more feelings of low self-worth and more anxiety than peers without DCD and younger children with DCD.30 Historically, parents have been told not to worry about their child's clumsiness because the child will outgrow the problem.31 However, current researchers in the area of DCD report that the children do not outgrow clumsiness and that, without intervention, they will not improve.1,8,12,27,31 Losse et al31 tested 17 children aged 6 years and retested them at age 16 years. The children with motor difficulties at 6 years of age continued to exhibit problems at 16 years of age. In another study,32 818 children with DCD were tested for reading comprehension at age 7 years and then again at age 10 years. A positive correlation in poor reading comprehension existed for children with DCD at 7 and 10 years of age. A follow-up study was conducted on 22-year-old individuals (N=55) who at age 7 years had either DCD or attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), or both.33 The children with DCD and those with both DCD and ADHD had poorer outcomes than their similarly aged peers without DCD and children with ADHD only. The children with DCD and those with both DCD and ADHD were found to have had more criminal offenses, more incidences of substance abuse and other psychiatric disorders, and lower levels of schooling. Treatment approaches used by occupational therapists and physical therapists can be broadly categorized into either bottom-up or top-down approaches (Tab. 1).10,12,34–36 Bottom-up approaches are based on hierarchical theories of motor control. These theories tend to explain the remediation of motor dysfunction through activation of higher levels of neuronal functioning in a child. The bottom-up approaches frequently used in managing children with DCD are sensory integration, the process-oriented treatment approach, and perceptual motor training.34 Summary of Bottom-Up Versus Top-Down Approaches Summary of Bottom-Up Versus Top-Down Approaches In sensory integration therapy, the child is provided sensory stimulation designed to promote motor development and higher cortical learning. A child undergoing sensory integration therapy may show some gains in motor development, but these gains often do not generalize to functional skills.34 Kinesthesia (the perception of one's own body parts, weight, and movement) is integral to the acquisition of motor skills in process-oriented treatment approaches. Therapeutic intervention with process-oriented treatment is based on specifically designed kinesthetic training activities. As described by Laszlo and Bairstow,37 this approach has an inherent reward system built into it through its use of positive reinforcement, presentation of desirable activities within the capabilities of the child, and judicious progression of the level of difficulty. The usefulness of the process-oriented treatment approach has been the subject of considerable study.9,10,37,38 Sims and colleagues35 suggested that much of the success of this approach can be attributed to a strong motivation effect, fostered by positive feedback and a sense of self-competence. Perceptual motor training, an eclectic approach, offers the child with DCD a wide range of motor experiences along with ample opportunities to practice these skills. Often, in outcome studies, children who receive perceptual motor training are compared with children who receive either sensory integration therapy or process-oriented treatment. Children perceptual motor training have been found to demonstrate motor to or greater than those of children either sensory integration therapy or process-oriented perceptual motor training, process-oriented may promote learning through positive feedback and reinforcement, these do not and to the that top-down approaches approaches use a approach to motor skill development and have been influenced by the systems approach to motor learning and control. This approach suggests that motor skills from an interaction of many both internal and external to the approaches also the in which motor behavior intervention and approaches or are the 2 most commonly intervention on of a The theoretical for intervention in a child's motor performance is the result of learning on a specific Motor tasks are into with each and then to the Children with this approach have demonstrated gains in motor skills.34 approaches to motor development problem The approach strategy the to to the and perform the well did plan The child verbal to the to motor learning. In this approach, the as a by the child out how to his or her motor performance on various motor intervention, the results of studies of approaches are In one 10 children with DCD who were with a approach to motor development were compared with 10 children who were with a bottom-up The children were for and groups on various standardized motor tests 10 treatment However, children in the approach group motor skill and to better than children who were the bottom-up and the approach both provide repetition and practice of specific motor skills, and the approach has the of problem The greater success of top-down when compared with bottom-up be a result of the top-down inclusion of both and motor learning with for attention to and memory as the child in activities. The results of these studies, in to outcome measures of the different approaches in children with DCD, would that approaches that systems theory on sensory information being only part of the and motor learning theory be most effective for these 2 a brief of clinical the of various treatment approaches used with children with of Treatment Approaches for Children With Developmental approach to daily occupational performance treatment approach treatment group integration, perceptual motor, gross and fine motor integration Assessment Battery for Test of Motor Test of for of Motor and of of Treatment Approaches for Children With Developmental approach to daily occupational performance treatment approach treatment group integration, perceptual motor, gross and fine motor integration Assessment Battery for Test of Motor Test of for of Motor and of The neuronal group selection theory can provide a for interpreting the in outcomes among the various approaches. children with moderate to cerebral palsy have a limited repertoire of primary neuronal which children with DCD are believed to experience difficulty at the level of secondary variability, that is, in and the most efficient and effective for a normal development, experience a primary role in the neuronal group selection that the for and According to the neuronal group selection theory, this of motor skill during the of secondary variability as a result of of neuronal selection of specific neurons within each repetition of synaptic within and among neuronal and sensory synaptic which act in and cortical and subcortical and following to a variety of motor of these connections is dependent on sensory Bottom-up approaches such as sensory integration, process-oriented and perceptual motor training sensory experience, with less on processing and motor Although an intervention based on information processing may provide the experience to the most effective neuronal bottom-up approaches may not provide for motor practice of and goal-directed tasks in order to reinforce and establish these approaches less on the specific impairments to decreased coordination and more on the of that is, the among a number of structures and systems and the within which the is Treatment based on a top-down approach that provide the child the to in problem while afferent subcortical structures the feedback and to identify and the most efficient movement for the Because integration, internal of motor and appropriate motor at the level of secondary the on sensory rather than factors by the bottom-up approaches in part, be for the observed in outcomes following treatment. A number of motor learning theories have been proposed in an attempt to explain the through which are into more complex According to the motor control and learning theory proposed by and motor circuits that the and following long-term these and functioning neuronal circuits through practice, the child is to motor into more complex movements. and proposed 2 to such the first of which on sensory to neuronal is during the second that the to the specific motor tasks through the and involving the and in the first of learning requires attention and The motor then in the of learning through repetition and top-down approaches meet both of these bottom-up approaches information processing only. the and of the neural in children with DCD is a not Motor control are complex and on functioning of and motor only are children with DCD a group in terms of functional disabilities the specific of the problems observed can from one child to the Because of these an approach to the management of children with DCD is Developmental coordination disorder is a complex disorder 5% to of school-aged children. intervention, these children will to exhibit poor motor skills and show deficits in other as for may (1) the most appropriate level of intervention (2) which produce results that generalize to the and provide long-term in motor (3) what have on the child's motor and (4) motor skills to the that to the

Physical Therapy · review · 472 citationsread the source →

Clinical Presentation of Left Atrial Cardiac Myxoma

Introduction Cardiac myxoma is the most frequent “benign” tumor of the heart and presents an important diagnostic challenge (4,43,47). Myxomas may resemble many cardiovascular or systemic diseases, and can arise in any of the cardiac chambers, although 75% occur in the left atrium. Most cases of atrial myxomas are now diagnosed in living patients, allowing successful surgical extirpation (1,3,30,44,53). Before the introduction of angiocardiography in 1951, cardiac myxoma diagnosis was made only at autopsy (22). The first successful surgical removal of an atrial myxoma was performed in 1954 (35,47). In 1959, the first M-mode echocardiogram of a left atrial myxoma was reported (16). Indeed, the introduction of echocardiography has provided an important noninvasive means of diagnosis for cardiac myxomas (55). Thus, the diagnosis of small myxomas (less than 5 cm in size and asymptomatic) is becoming easier. We report here the experience of a French cardiovascular center in the clinical presentation of left atrial myxomas. The large number of patients in this series allowed us to perform an analytic, clinicopathologic study. Patients and Methods We reviewed the 112 cases of left atrial myxoma seen at 1 institution (Hôpital Louis Pradel, Lyons, France) over a 40-year period (1959–1998). In all cases the diagnosis was established before surgical removal. The patients’ medical records were reviewed, and data concerning clinical presentation, diagnostic methods, and postoperative course were collected. Histopathologic slides were reviewed for all cases by the same pathologist (RL). Other locations where cardiac myxoma occurred during that time period were the right atrium (15 cases), left ventricle (2 cases), and right ventricle (1 case). Follow-up information was obtained by contacting either the patients or the attending physicians, and a standardized questionnaire was completed for each case. Statistical analysis A chi-square test, or the Fisher exact test when required, was performed for all qualitative variables, and odds ratios (OR) with 95% confidence intervals (95% CI) were computed. For ordinal variables a Wilcoxon rank sum test was used. Data analysis was performed using SAS (Statistical Analysis System, SAS Institute Inc., Cary, NC). The variables studied in the statistical analysis were 1) sex and age, period of diagnosis (before or after echocardiography was available), delay to diagnosis (delay between the first symptoms and diagnosis), possible systematic (serendipitous) discovery; 2) size of the tumor (> or < 5 cm), tumor surface appearance (smooth or villous); 3) the main symptoms: cardiac (cardiac failure, malaise or syncope, chest pain or palpitations), embolic (cerebral, coronary, or peripheral artery), systemic (fever, weight loss, or pseudo-connective tissue disease signs), or neurologic (stroke, vertigo, epilepsy, coma, or other signs); 4) cardiac auscultation modifications (pseudo-mitral signs, “tumor plop”, nonspecific other signs); 5) possible chest X-ray abnormalities (left cardiac failure signs, cardiomegaly, pleural effusion, left atrium enlargement, visible myxoma when calcified), electrocardiogram (ECG) alterations (arrhythmias or conduction disturbances, ST-segment and T-wave shifts, left atrial hypertrophy, and nonspecific signs), or serologic test abnormalities (elevated erythrocyte sedimentation rate [ESR], anemia). Results Patient characteristics The study group included 72 women, (64% of the whole sample; median age, 53 yr; range, 23–84 yr) and 40 men (36% of the sample; median age, 58 yr, range, 5–77 yr). Forty-six patients (41% of the sample, 31 women, 15 men) were less than 50 years old, 47 (42%, 31 women, 16 men) were between 50 and 70 years, and 19 (17%, 10 women, 9 men) were older than 70. Age distribution was homogenous in men, but most female patients were between 40 and 60 years old (Figure 1).Fig. 1: Age distribution of 112 patients with left atrial myxoma. The clinical and laboratory features of left atrial myxoma in our series are presented in Table 1. The different frequencies of clinical and laboratory signs according to sex and age are detailed in Table 2. Male patients were more at risk than females for embolic complications and for neurologic symptoms; females were more at risk than males to develop systemic symptoms such as fever; younger patients (age <50 yr) had more neurologic symptoms and cardiac auscultation abnormalities than older patients (age >50 yr).TABLE 1: Clinical and laboratory features of left atrial myxoma (112 cases)TABLE 2: Frequencies of clinical and laboratory signs by sex and age*We divided the patients into 2 groups according to the pre-and post-echocardiography periods: 1) between 1959 and 1977, when the only diagnostic methods were angiocardiography and cardiac cathe-terization, only 14 patients (12.5%) underwent surgery; 2) since 1977, with 2-dimensional echocardiography use (transthoracic, then transesophageal), about 5 patients per year have undergone surgery for left atrial myxoma (98 patients, 87.5%). The sex ratio and age ranges are similar in these 2 patient groups, but other differences can be identified (Table 3). Before 1977, most patients were diagnosed on the basis of serologic or blood test abnormalities (particularly elevated ESR) and radiologic abnormalities; chest X-ray evidence of cardiac failure or left atrium enlargement was particularly prevalent in patients diagnosed before 1977 compared with those diagnosed after 1977 (p = 0.006 and p = 0.02, respectively).TABLE 3: Symptoms by year of diagnosis*Delay before surgery In our series, the time interval between symptoms onset and diagnosis (surgical removal) varied from 0 to 126 months (median, 4 mo). The median delay before surgery was 5.5 months before 1977, and 3 months after 1977; the difference is not significant. The median delay to diagnosis increased significantly when cardiac symptoms were present; there was no significant difference for the other symptoms (Table 4).TABLE 4: Delay to diagnosis by year and by principal clinical symptoms*Initial symptoms ( Figure 2) For 11 patients, the left atrial myxoma diagnosis was a mere chance, or serendipitous, discovery (“systematic findings” in Figure 2). Among these patients, in 9 cases echocardiography (8 cases) or computed tomography (CT) (1 case) was performed for another indication and allowed a diagnosis of myxoma. For 2 patients, echocardiography had been systematically performed during follow-up for surgery on a right atrial myxoma. Fig. 2: Initial symptoms of left atrial myxoma (112 cases).The most common initial symptoms of left atrial myxoma in our series were related to mitral valve obstruction: dizziness and occasionally syncope, palpitations, dyspnea, cough, pulmonary edema, or congestive heart failure were observed in 58 patients. Eight patients showed atypical paroxysmal clinical manifestations: chest pain, hemoptysis, limb claudication, thoracic noise, shortness of breath, or syncope when reclining. Embolic manifestations suggested myxoma in 18 patients. Constitutional or general systemic signs appeared as initial manifestations for 17 patients: myalgia, muscle weakness, arthralgia, fever, weight loss, fatigue, and Raynaud syndrome. Clinical features at diagnosis All patients presented with at least 1 or more symptoms of the classic triad: 1) obstructive cardiac signs; 2) embolic signs; and 3) constitutional or systemic manifestations (See Table 1). 1) Intracardiac obstruction signs occurred in 75 patients. Pulmonary edema or progressive congestive cardiac failure (dyspnea, orthopnea) were the most common symptoms (n = 48). Malaise or syncope occurred in 16 cases. Two patients experienced cardiac arrest before surgery and fully recovered after resuscitation. Other nonspecific cardiac symptoms were present in 34 patients: cough, thoracic pain, palpi-tations, myocardial infarction due to coronary embolism. Malaise, palpitations, or thoracic pain could vary with body postural changes. 2) Signs of embolism were present in 33 patients, either with 1 (n = 25) or several (n = 8) locations. Embolic locations were the central nervous system (n = 24), in 1 case in the retinal artery, the upper and lower extremities (n = 15), and the coronary arteries (n = 4). 3) Thirty-eight patients presented with systemic or constitutional symptoms. These symptoms were obviously nonspecific, including fever (n = 22), weight loss or fatigue (n = 20), and immunologic diseases mimicking symptoms such as myalgia, muscle weakness, arthralgia, or Raynaud syndrome (n = 6). 4) Other clinical presentations 4.1) Twenty-nine patients had neurologic symptoms, particularly transient or permanent motor or sensory neurologic deficiencies (n = 23), when cerebral emboli were present (stroke). Three of these patients developed multiple cerebral aneurysms, induced by cerebral emboli. Three patients had epileptic fits, or multilocular sclerosis mimicking symptoms. Six patients also suffered from other neurologic manifestations, such as vertigo or coma. One patient with streptococcal meningitis underwent surgery for a supposed antibiotic-resistant endocarditis suggested by echocardiographic findings, but surgery uncovered an incidental noninfected myxoma. 4.2) One patient had fever and positive blood cultures for Streptococcus viridans. 4.3) Three patients were investigated for liver abnormalities connected in fact with right cardiac failure. 4.4) For 3 patients, the main symptoms were abdominal pain or hemoptysis. Physical examination (cardiac auscultation) On cardiac auscultation 72 patients (64%) had abnormal findings, 18 (16%) of them with postural changes or with time examination modifications. These murmurs looked like significant mitral stenosis findings: apical diastolic or presystolic murmur (n = 60, 53%). A tumor plop was heard in 17 patients (15%), all before 1989. Other auscultatory features were changes in preexisting murmurs, gallops, or modification of the first (split) or second heart sound (n = 12, 11%). A significant was observed between cardiac auscultation abnormalities and 1) systemic symptoms (fever, weight loss or and 2) cardiac symptoms and signs (cardiac failure, (Table no between auscultatory signs and embolic or neurologic symptoms was between clinical The most frequent laboratory was in patients Table 1). in men, in was observed in 15 patients. blood or was present in patients. The between these serologic abnormalities and systemic manifestations was significant Table there was no significant between serologic signs and or neurologic symptoms. abnormalities of the patients (n = had abnormal Table 1). atrial was the most frequent (n = or or conduction were Other were ST-segment abnormalities (n = or nonspecific abnormalities (n = hypertrophy, The of abnormalities with systemic manifestations and cardiac signs was significant Table was no significant with embolic or neurologic symptoms. were abnormal in patients Table 1). included pulmonary or congestive heart failure signs (n = and nonspecific (n = atrial enlargement (n = that made the tumor visible (n = and pleural were (n = The of radiologic abnormalities with systemic and cardiac manifestations was significant Table X-ray abnormalities were significantly less frequent in patients with embolic or neurologic methods Before 1977, all cases were diagnosed by angiocardiography with left heart (n = 1977, echocardiography was the diagnostic (n = only M-mode echocardiography was (Figure 3). 2-dimensional and particularly echocardiography the methods in many cases. For 2 patients the diagnosis was established by or 3: A myxoma is seen in the left The diagnosis of myxoma was obtained after surgical tumor for all cases. On the tumor from 1 cm to 15 The size was for was than 5 cm in and in cases had been during The weight of the from 15 to In our series of the myxomas were with a cm), and were the left atrial myxomas in our series, the and from the left atrial with only a other left and small mitral valve The myxoma surface was studied in was or in of these (n = and (Figure 4) in the other cases (n = The less common or (Figure 5) myxomas had a surface that of multiple or and with a to (Figure 4: left atrial myxoma after left atrial were on the of myxoma in an of an The myxoma had a or an and a were the The surface of the tumor was by a of was observed in of the cases. We with a myxoma from with a and or different of 1) (Figure with or by then by 2) (Figure with many or in the of the cases were left atrial of them with and with were myxomas with All were observed in patients with myxoma and atrial myxoma with with myxoma in atrial myxoma with or myxoma in significant could be between myxoma size or 5 and diagnosis or or of or serologic symptoms or signs (Table 6). a myxoma size cm was significantly with cardiac symptoms, auscultatory signs, and and chest X-ray of myxomas appeared to be more and the delay to diagnosis was for small than for large Table of clinical features to myxoma size was significantly with neurologic symptoms, embolic and cardiac auscultation there was no significant between and or X-ray signs or symptoms; discovery; or delay in diagnosis (Table of clinical features to myxoma surface course All patients had patients during the 1 patient in during a second surgical for a of myxoma years after the first surgical a on in with cardiac and on the second postoperative from a in from mitral by a mitral and a in from meningitis with the the incidental tumor had been 1 patient a mitral valve endocarditis was with the myxoma. The most frequent postoperative was transient or atrial in patients A permanent cardiac for was for only 2 patients. Follow-up the postoperative patients were to patients to and not our Among the other patients, 4 and were during the follow-up Patients presented with peripheral fully The follow-up for patients with multiple cerebral is 14 years a In the present series, were for a median of 3 years 1 yr). Six patients had a of myxoma. Three patients with myxoma in the left and 17 years Three other patients had One of them suffered 2 in the left 16 and months The other 2 patients with had an initial myxoma in the right for 1 of them the was in the left atrium 3 years and for the other the were multiple in the left atrium and years and then in the right atrium years We report here the series of patients with left atrial myxoma diagnosed in a to our The patients presented over a 40-year ratio is with other in this ratio from to Myxomas can occur in all but are most frequent between the and of occur in although there is no for this female due in to In our series, younger age is significantly with neurologic signs or cardiac auscultation and is with neurologic or embolic symptoms in men and systemic symptoms in Clinical features The clinical features of these are by and there are no signs and symptoms that the of a myxoma In a of there are no symptoms at all in our there is no significant between the size of the tumor or 5 and the of discovery or atrial myxomas when the mitral or systemic 1) symptoms occur in of patients in our cases as mitral valve in mitral atrial and of fever are only of patients had in our study. Cardiac obstruction can be by progressive congestive cardiac failure on or or by syncope, or to mitral valve obstruction by the myxoma or coronary arteries The of obstruction may vary with body and these postural changes are particularly of myxoma (35,47). Cardiac failure the most frequent in our In our the of cardiac signs increased the diagnosis to that clinical symptoms are by another more common disease due to 2) emboli are the second of the classic in of myxoma patients in our study. than of emboli to the central nervous system in our but any may be to a of symptoms and cases emboli in the upper and lower coronary and more emboli may to aneurysms, as of cardiac myxomas as in 3 patients in our was 12, yr, We that the of an or surface is significantly with cerebral and peripheral 3) Constitutional signs are the of the classic these symptoms are may occur in to of cases The is lower in our series studied a at a cardiovascular These signs and symptoms myalgia, muscle weakness, arthralgia, fever, weight loss, and are obviously nonspecific and may occur in a of or or immunologic diseases tissue manifestations have also been reported in myxoma patients Cardiac auscultation Cardiac auscultatory may vary between and may on body presystolic or diastolic murmurs, significant mitral may be heard in more than of the patients in our The auscultatory of myxoma is “tumor is a heart sound of heard after the second heart sound may be with a heart sound or a mitral The tumor plop is in only of patients in our We established a significant between cardiac auscultation abnormalities and cardiac or systemic symptoms. and are abnormal in only of the patients those with systemic symptoms significant was in our The main but nonspecific laboratory abnormalities are and elevated or is or may occur by on the has also been common are and that the and of a by the tumor may be for systemic and manifestations has been with of in patients with myxoma that to after surgical removal A between the size of the tumor and the of has also been suggested have also been in myxoma tissue myxoma tissue in cases by and are nonspecific but observed in our atrial in of patients, the alterations by the is (less than of cases) in to the in mitral valve We observed a significant between signs and the of cardiac or systemic symptoms. also nonspecific features in the patients and are not for when the tumor is in our a left atrium enlargement and signs of pulmonary may be In our series, chest X-ray abnormalities were significantly with cardiac or systemic symptoms, but there were radiologic signs when the myxoma was by embolic or neurologic In cardiac signs or symptoms are more prevalent with large and may that embolic becoming are diagnosed before the the size 5 that to cardiac and radiologic data a positive between small tumor size and embolic Table 6). methods is the and diagnostic of is and not any risk of tumor and and cardiac examination may be by the echocardiography is less with an to but echocardiography the for surgery is only on echocardiographic evidence of the in our series angiocardiography has not been since coronary in patients over 40 years old is in to coronary disease Other diagnostic methods and The of and over echocardiography is that of and thoracic are also more in tumor and tumor and size data that most left atrial myxomas arise from the atrial or the on the of and on the appearance is or with a or or is and the surface is either or and in our myxomas with constitutional symptoms, or In the such as and surface are seen in older that In our series, there was no significant between and The size and weight of myxomas but in our the of symptoms was in patients with on could or myxomas and or myxomas according to the of the that all occurred in patients with and myxomas. the of cardiac myxomas have been The of most is that myxomas are of is no that myxomas are myxomas may have a of that at first may be the of multiple surface or is not with or any of presentation, and is important not to an on the basis of these atypical are cardiac not be with myxomas The to the tumor are to be and analysis has that myxoma as tumor = and are and may be for and cases with is as is the showed that was by is also a for the that myxomas arise from the to A study that myxomas with a between tumor size and the of this a in Myxomas may to the but these not have any The myxoma tissue emboli may may the and may or may but any cerebral tissue years the may to Three patients in our series had embolic that into the with of multiple aneurysms, any or during and follow-up The of for myxomas is surgical removal the diagnosis is of the tumor is Embolic complications or are in patients: of patients in the time of our series, not due to cardiac but 2 patients had cardiac arrest in the before surgery with successful resuscitation. surgery is a as most are can be The may according to In our series, was 3 patients during the postoperative period before and another patient in of meningitis not to myxoma. The most frequent postoperative was transient or with an of Cardiac myxomas occur but or cases have been The reported rate ranges from to in the in our are reported from as as a months to as as years after of the myxoma in our The of is not but risk or of tumor of the a of tumor in the In most cases of of the to be the of Patients with abnormalities are at risk of and from 2 or more of the cardiac and myxomas or of the with and are as or The risk of for and myxomas is about and is only for In our series, 3 cases the cardiac myxoma the time of myxoma patients are younger than myxoma patients. myxomas of the 2 patient groups are not A to has been identified The is In the the rate is and after of myxomas ranges from 0 to in our may surgical removal in our A patients may permanent cardiac for conduction 2 patients in our In of the of a tumor that with mitral valve to in heart failure, the mitral valve is In our only 1 patient mitral valve for endocarditis with left atrial myxoma. the myxoma patients to be and cases. echocardiogram is over the period at diagnosis The mitral valve other and heart more common than and occur in patients with myocardial infarction or systemic symptoms are present (fever, weight loss, the diagnosis heart and tissue disease or The of embolic and constitutional symptoms is due more to but may also myxoma. The of or syndrome to the 2 diseases, as these are in myxoma. myxomas are occasionally the clinical of myxoma and endocarditis more of cardiac myxomas reported 40 cases with a presentation similar to is no clinical between and noninfected myxoma cardiac symptoms and the rate of systemic or cerebral constitutional symptoms significantly in patients with myxoma (fever, elevated and men are more than series of 112 cases of left atrial myxoma clinical that this tumor may a of clinical symptoms not only such as cardiac but also or neurologic is made only on clinical there are no signs or symptoms. but or cases have been that and of the by the tumor may be for or including the is the of for diagnosis and follow-up of this myxomas are be in the diagnosis of mitral valve disease and congestive heart failure, in patients with is also for any patient with embolic embolic in in the of signs or symptoms of endocarditis or to a of myxoma as the embolic The obtained by be are to the clinical features of in in myxoma or be studied for embolic myxomas with of could be performed to for the ratio and age We a series of 112 cases of left atrial myxoma diagnosed in a French and 40 age range, yr) over 40 years, from 1959 to Symptoms of mitral valve the first of the classic of myxoma presentation, were present in 75 patients with cardiac failure or Symptoms of the second frequent presentation in the classic were observed in 33 cases with 1 or several cerebral emboli with are at risk than females of embolic The of the classic of constitutional symptoms with fever, weight loss, or symptoms tissue due to and patients have more neurologic symptoms, and female patients have more systemic symptoms. patients (64%) had cardiac auscultation valve disease and more the tumor plop The most frequent was left atrial were The number of myxoma patients diagnosed after 1977 the introduction of echocardiography as a noninvasive diagnostic there was no significant in the time from onset of symptoms to between patients seen in the before and after The tumor from 1 to 15 cm with a weight of between 15 and The myxoma surface was or in of the and in the other cases. Myxomas in patients with embolism have a those in patients with cardiac symptoms, auscultation signs, tumor and electrocardiogram or radiologic signs of left atrium and are significantly the The is and only 4 occurred our 112 cases over a median follow-up of 3 The rate is but follow-up and echocardiography are for patients. The surgical were performed during the 40-year period by We are to for the

Medicine · review · 878 citationsread the source →

Metastasis Suppressor Proteins: Discovery, Molecular Mechanisms, and Clinical Application

Clinically and experimentally, primary tumor formation and metastasis are distinct processes — locally growing tumors can progress without the development of metastases. This observation prompted the hypothesis that the molecular processes regulating tumorigenicity and metastasis are distinguishable and could be targeted therapeutically. During the process of transformation and subsequent progression to a malignant phenotype, both genetic and epigenetic alterations alter a cell's ability to perceive and respond to signals that regulate normal tissue homeostasis. A minority of tumorigenic cells accrue the full complement of alterations that enables them to disseminate from the primary tumor, survive insults from the immune system and biophysical forces, and respond to growth-promoting and/or inhibitory signals from the distant tissues and thrive there. Identification of genes and proteins that specifically inhibit the ability of cells to form metastases (e.g., metastasis suppressors) is providing new insights into the molecular mechanisms that regulate this complex process. This review will highlight: (a) the functional identification of metastasis suppressors, (b) the signaling cascades and cellular phenotypes which are controlled or modulated by metastasis suppressors, and (c) opportunities for translation and clinical trials that are based on mechanistic studies regarding metastasis suppressors. The identification of nm23, the first metastasis suppressor gene, provided functional evidence for the existence of genes that specifically regulate metastasis (1, 2). Subsequent to this initial discovery, researchers used in vivo studies to identify additional metastasis suppressors. These pioneering studies used an unbiased approach to identify such candidates by demonstrating that ectopic expression of the putative suppressor gene inhibited the development of spontaneous macroscopic metastases without significantly affecting primary tumor growth (3–5). Recently, this definition has been extended to include genes which specifically inhibit metastatic colonization (i.e., experimental metastasis formation using i.v. injection). The use of in vivo assays is required because in vitro assays are often of inadequate complexity to sufficiently model the entire process of metastasis. Furthermore, there are currently no in vitro models that allow the study of preferential growth within different target tissues. Table 1 lists the proteins which have bona fide metastasis suppressor activity in vivo (i.e., suppression of metastasis following ectopic expression into metastatic cell lines). It is interesting to note that metastasis suppressor activity for many of these genes would not have been predicted a priori based on their known cellular function(s). Furthermore, the unbiased, functional strategy identified novel genes for which no cellular function was known at the time of discovery. Metastasis suppressors can impart their suppressive activity at one or more of the steps in the metastatic cascade (6). For example, in vivo studies showed that metastatic cancer cells which express ectopic KISS1, JNKK1/MKK4, MKK6, MKK7, TXNIP, nm23-H1, or SSeCKS proteins could successfully disseminate and lodge at secondary sites, but are suppressed in their ability to colonize (i.e., form overt metastases) target tissues (7–12). After lodging at secondary sites, disseminated cells may die, persist as nondividing cells, or initiate growth (13). Such pivotal cellular decisions depend on both the expression of a specific gene profile as well as the activation status of key signaling pathways and the cumulative inputs of timing, amplitude, and duration of signaling responses. In short, cells expressing metastasis suppressors grow at primary sites, but fail to proliferate at secondary or metastatic sites, suggesting differential responses to site-specific external signals. Although the observation that a gene of interest functions as a metastasis suppressor is an excellent starting point, research is now focused on the biochemical and molecular mechanisms by which metastasis suppressor proteins execute their in vivo functions. Metastasis suppressors vary widely in their cellular locations and biochemical functions. Such proteins could display either extracellular (e.g., KISS1) or intracellular localization patterns. Within the cell, they are located in various cellular compartments, from the plasma membrane (e.g., cadherin, KAI1, CD44), cytoskeleton (e.g., RhoGDI2, gelsolin), cytosol (e.g., JNKK1/MKK4, nm23-H1, RKIP), mitochondria (e.g., caspase 8), and nucleus (e.g., BRMS1, CRSP3, TXNIP) (14–21).Cells respond to external stimuli by using a limited number of signaling pathways. Signaling specificity is achieved, at least in part, by combinatorial spatiotemporal activation of signaling proteins. The summation of these signaling events, enabled by a cell-specific gene expression profile, is a tailored, situation-appropriate response. During the process of transformation and progression to a malignant phenotype, both genetic and epigenetic alterations influence a cell's ability to perceive and respond to signals which regulate normal tissue homeostasis. The accumulation of such alterations during progressive rounds of cell division could endow a minority of tumorigenic cells with the ability to disseminate from the primary tumor. It is likely that as a result of these changes, metastatic cells are no longer bound by tissue-of-origin–derived signaling specificity and acquire the ability to modulate their responses to the changing environments encountered throughout the metastatic cascade. Current data supports a model in which ectopic expression of metastasis suppressor proteins may restore, at least in part, the endogenous signaling repertoire of earlier, more benign cellular generations, thereby blocking metastasis formation. In this light, metastasis formation can be viewed as the result of a cell's ability to respond to multiple growth milieus as opposed to being restricted to growth in the microenvironment of the tissue of origin. Defining pathways regulating metastatic growth requires the integration and interpretation of data obtained over experimental settings ranging from the molecular interactions of specific proteins, to communication between signaling networks within single cells, and ultimately cellular interactions among populations of cells that yield a particular disease state. This line of inquiry is a particular challenge in studies of metastasis regulation because of the complexity and diversity of downstream events that take place in metastasis formation. The majority of metastasis suppressors identified participate in highly conserved eukaryotic signal transduction pathways. Based on their known biochemical functions, we have divided the metastasis suppressors into four general signaling categories: cytoskeletal signaling, mitogenic pathways, stress-activated pathways, and survival pathways (Fig. 1). Although it may seem straightforward to place a metastatic suppressor into a linear signaling pathway, it is important to be mindful that these pathways are, in fact, dynamic networks that exist in series and parallel leading to crosstalk and interplay; phenomena known as emergent properties. The cytoskeleton is a dynamic structure that enables motility, deformability, and flexibility, while maintaining cellular architecture. For most nonhematopoietic cells, motility is an ancillary function; however, as a nonhematopoietic cell transitions from the benign to the invasive to the metastatic state, motility becomes an increasingly paramount ability. Without a dynamic actin cytoskeleton, a tumor cell would be incapable of intravasation or extravasation, and the cellular deformability is necessary to complete the metastatic cascade. Not surprisingly, several proteins involved in cellular motility have been implicated as metastasis suppressors. The Rho family of GTP-binding proteins, which include Rho, Rac, and Cdc42, are central players in the regulation of actin dynamics. The Rho-GTPase family consists of small 20 to 30 kDa monomeric GTP-binding proteins that bind GDP/GTP and hydrolyze GTP, leading to the activation of downstream effector molecules (22). In this signaling scheme, metastasis suppressors have been identified as upstream inhibitors of the Rho family (23), or downstream effectors (24). RhoGDIs inhibit Rho family members by impeding the dissociation of GDP from Rho proteins, thereby locking the Rho protein in its inactive state, preventing Rho proteins from interacting with effector targets, and/or sequestering Rho-GTPases in the cytosol (25). RHOGDI2 was shown to suppress experimental lung metastasis but not affect in vitro growth or in vivo tumorigenicity. The Src-suppressed C kinase substrate is a protein kinase C substrate with protein scaffolding properties that have been shown to be a negative regulator of Rho family members (26). Reexpression of Src-suppressed C kinase substrate suppressed secondary lung metastases in nude mice and increased cell-cell adhesion, yet had little effect on primary tumor growth (10). Furthermore, Src-suppressed C kinase substrate reexpression at physiologic levels suppresses podosome formation and correlates with the induction of normal actin cytoskeletal structures and cell morphology, but not with the inhibition of Src kinase activity in cells (26).The finding that RhoGDI displayed the ability to suppress metastasis suggested that the downstream molecules it inhibits may have metastasis-promoting activities. This hypothesis seems to hold true in that mice deficient in RhoC, a target of RhoGDI, displayed a marked decrease in metastasis potential (27). Furthermore, specific inhibition of a downstream effector of Rho, ROCK, decreased tumor cell invasiveness in vitro and reduced the dissemination of tumor cells implanted in the peritoneal cavity in vivo (28). RhoGDI2 has also been shown to regulate secreted growth factors such as endothelin 1 (ET-1), which contribute to metastasis and will be discussed below (29). This prometastasic activation of effectors downstream of the Rho family is not universal. Gelsolin is a downstream effector of Rac that regulates the length of actin via its filament severing and capping activities. Overexpression of gelsolin has been shown to inhibit metastasis in vivo (24). Counterintuitively, gelsolin is an indispensable protein of podosomes, which are thought to play an active role in tissue invasion and matrix remodeling through their regulation of matrix metalloprotease (MMP) activity (30, 31).Cell interactions with the extracellular matrix and with neighboring cells trigger numerous responses that have essential roles in the regulation of behavior and fate. Integrin-mediated cell adhesions provide bidirectional links between the microenvironment and the cytoskeleton. This crosstalk between a cell and its local environment occurs whether the cell is benign, malignant, or metastatic. In this light, the cytoskeleton serves as a conduit for the integration and processing of intracellular and extracellular information; however, changes in the cytoskeletal program during pathologic progression may alter how this information is integrated and processed. Two metastasis suppressors have been shown to have interactions with integrins. Connective tissue growth factor is a 38-kDa cysteine-rich heparin-binding protein which is a secreted growth factor that can bind to integrins on the cell surface (32). Ectopic expression of connective tissue growth factor inhibited metastatic colonization by lung cancer cells (33). In contrast, the KAI1 metastasis suppressor protein is a member of the tetraspanin family of proteins and has been shown to interact with a myriad of cell surface proteins including other tetraspans (i.e., CD9, CD81), integrins β1 and β2, MHCII growth factor receptors, and intracellular signaling proteins such as protein kinase C (34). It has been hypothesized that KAI1 modulates integrin and growth receptor signaling by accelerating the rate of internalization via a protein kinase C–dependent pathway, thereby modulating cell adhesion and cell migration (34). Furthermore, KAI1 has been shown to decrease the integrin- and ligand-induced activation of the receptor tyrosine kinase c-Met, and independently decreases integrin-induced Src activation. Both c-Met and Src are thought to be required for invasion (35). A final observation with respect to the involvement of integrins in metastasis suppressor activity concerns caspase-8 function. Loss of caspase-8 in neuroblastoma cells leads to increased survival and an increased incidence of metastasis. The induction of caspase-8-mediated apoptosis seems to be due to unligated integrins because decreased expression of unligated integrins enhanced cell survival (36–38).Claudin-4 is a component of tight junctions which form the most apical component of intercellular junctional complexes where they establish cell polarity and cellular functions such as permeability (39, 40). These intercellular junctions not only carry out adhesive functions but also contain crucial components of signaling pathways that regulate epithelial proliferation and differentiation. Complementary in vitro and in vivo studies identified claudin-4 as an inhibitor of invasion and metastasis in pancreatic cancer cells and a target of transforming growth factor-β and extracellular signal-regulated kinase (ERK) signaling (40, 41).RECK, a membrane glycoprotein that encodes a GPI-anchored glycoprotein harboring three protease inhibitor–like domains, has been shown to negatively regulate MMP-2, MMP-9, and MT1-MMPs in vitro, suggesting that it is an important regulator of extracellular matrix remodeling. Furthermore, RECK-null mouse embryos displayed markedly elevated MMP activity. Interestingly, RECK is down-regulated by Ras signaling, a commonly altered pathway in many malignant cells (42).The role of some putative metastasis suppressors is more complex. There are several of a protein as a metastasis suppressor in one model and a potential tumor suppressor in For example, is a glycoprotein that responses of the cell to their cellular Although it has been in the that of has been shown to suppress metastasis in the cancer system other have that may metastatic activity a of the invasion and of and has been suggested to be a is not the only protein to have an role in metastasis. are a of that cell-cell adhesion in various tissues in a function is controlled by its Both and seem to inhibit cell migration and the in vivo metastatic potential of cells other studies have suggested that may invasion It is important to note that cancer cells of tissue used in several of the The tissue specificity of metastasis suppressor function is with the and integration information through signal transduction is a secreted protein and is hypothesized to processing by The are known as or not be secreted in to its metastatic suppressor activity has yet to be at the identification of upstream of identified a metastasis suppressor activity for CRSP3, a of the receptor of cells with suppressed metastasis and was with an of providing a potential between these and metastasis regulation stress-activated protein and pathways in parallel to the protein kinase In to the of with and have been with cell and apoptosis in to and changes, and growth factor specifically either or The protein is a kinase that has been shown to and the and in to a of extracellular can function as a metastasis suppressor in both and cancer Complementary in vitro and in vivo assays showed that the kinase activity of is required for the suppression of overt metastases and is to Subsequent studies identified metastasis suppressor for and in and interest is the finding that in cancer signals through the of the pathway to suppress metastasis in cancer signals through the of the pathway to suppress metastasis In vivo studies that both and suppress the formation of overt metastases by the ability of disseminated cells to colonize the lung identification of a metastasis suppressor function for protein also or protein mechanistic between the to cellular and of metastatic ability. is an endogenous inhibitor of a component of a system that has been implicated in cancer progression The levels of in cells are by endogenous as the in to to and including The primary of cellular is the is through of membrane or in to to with molecular or thereby highly or a of events that result in cell and of metastasis. this and ectopic expression of modulates these events to suppress metastasis formation is currently pathway is by mitogenic such as growth growth or which receptor tyrosine and The of mitogenic factors to cell surface a series of that with the activation of various factors and proteins and regulation may at in this is through both the of a kinase for a as well as protein expression levels of regulation are by intracellular localization and with scaffolding or proteins. These events may be important for regulating metastatic In the of metastasis the protein with the by to and the kinase suppressor of Ras a protein that has a role in the regulation of Ras activity and activation of the pathway has been shown to regulate signaling, suggesting that metastasis suppression activity may be by the inhibition of signaling kinase inhibitor protein was identified as a metastasis suppressor gene in functions as a negative upstream regulator of signaling and kinase interact with at sites, and of either inhibits of the Both be in to inhibition may suppress metastasis by of metastasis suppressors, and are with the signaling The signaling pathway a key role in many of cell survival and 1 are of an inhibitory and a and signals from various cellular proteins such as and an integration for the activation of and downstream to a that a of downstream targets, the and also regulates a of target proteins that cell proliferation and survival The levels of are and several particular interest is the which to signaling metastasis suppressor protein has been with the of cells showed decreases in endogenous levels of (i.e., of This finding is with a model in which changes in signaling the ability of disseminated cells to survive in the and grow at secondary In contrast, expression of the metastasis suppressor is modulated by clinical is the finding that expression correlates significantly with in both and cancer and that the in as a significantly of and cancer survival either evidence from the cell molecular and genetic studies that the metastatic process requires many steps to The of only one in this of in vivo events the process and a This enabled the identification of metastasis suppressor proteins. the of the however, the is not as straightforward because which signaling in the metastatic process are is not have insights into this by metastatic colonization as the in the metastatic cascade that is from a of A clinical will this to of invasive are with metastatic and (i.e., These that many with invasive disease disseminated cancer cells at preventing the of disseminated cells into the metastatic (i.e., the process of would a for cancer This approach more at preventing cancer cells from the primary tumor for the that this process has place the is first with In where this process has not yet local such as and can the the for additional at the an for metastasis preventing the growth of disseminated tumor cells into an overt clinical metastasis or the metastases. the approach not the in hold disease in providing increased of the with both of these is the identification of at for disease that they may at metastatic that can be to this include both tumor as well as molecular of the primary tumor to the development of metastasis a it has been to of the disseminated tumor cells at a secondary as the and as being distinct from that at the primary with to the tumor tumor cells distinct in the primary and secondary sites, and these interactions can or include locally and as well as cell-cell interactions in environments such as the and these with the of metastasis suppressor protein one can to there are to metastasis suppressor proteins. The of these on of the leading to of metastasis suppressor protein For example, the gene is it that of a normal gene would be the In contrast, was secondary to suppressed for example, at the endogenous gene seem we will provide an of approach from that have the of the first identified metastasis a of metastasis suppressor protein function in disseminated tumor In many cancer is with metastasis that occurs A study used gene to and whether this would cancer metastasis in an model of this A cell line of metastatic potential to the by in vivo was used to the of reexpression on metastasis. of these cells, an expressing was This in expression of the gene in most of the tumor cells in in and was with a in the number of metastases and a of This of of the of induction as a approach The of this approach are also to the of which is a disease that the In with gene is and the with i.v. development from the also the of the metastasis gene but the approach reexpression of the endogenous gene as a the was to a that would expression and allow at to on at of the This of would a that is and with an and have been to For example, was to expression in a cell line elevated the expression of cells out an of the the that elevated the expression of metastatic cell is a used at in and as well as at in cancer Furthermore, elevated expression and inhibited colonization and this effect was through The effect of on the of expression was in an in vivo model system for the of metastases the cell line to lung mice to or in of mice to of The number of metastases mouse was reduced by to on the metastases in reduced by to in the inhibited the number and of metastases in this This in metastases was with reexpression in the lung a of in with metastases and and tumors is of gene expression alterations with of metastasis suppressor protein A would be that functional of metastasis suppressor proteins is with gene expression changes, and cellular Recently, this with the that of metastasis suppressor proteins is with the of was used to a novel These studies focused on RhoGDI2, a suppressor of metastasis in an model of cancer metastasis reduced expression was to be with decreased survival for with cancer that RhoGDI2 as a on the expression of genes and to identify such genes in a of the lung metastasis model and primary clinical of RhoGDI2 protein is currently they to proteins or pathways downstream of These genes required to be following the of RhoGDI2 protein from the cells, and be of being inhibited by or to the changes in gene expression following of RhoGDI2 expression in metastatic cells, several proteins including This finding was by the between RhoGDI2 expression levels and of in tumor (29). Furthermore, inhibition of the endothelin with of the endothelin receptor such as to metastatic suppression in cells deficient for RhoGDI2 (29). The endothelin has been shown to regulate tissue cell cell and remodeling also has on cells in the and lung important of cancer metastasis In to such may growth factor and factor and growth factor one in the proliferation of and cells tumor also a role for in metastases from and and supports a model in which cells, in providing a microenvironment for these that trials with endothelin may be for with cancer following of the primary The for its use in the from the effect these have had in preventing experimental metastasis. These however, not the of these in metastatic but this is yet to be The molecular shown between and RhoGDI2 is because of endothelin receptor A such as with clinical In fact, in with in a the most events and that is well In this there was no at to in other of was not by this the of this effector approach to other metastasis suppressor proteins could identify potential novel for in other for and during the of key of this

Clinical Cancer Research · review · 131 citationsread the source →

Heart rate variability

IN FOCUSHeart rate variabilityHarald M. StaussHarald M. StaussDepartment of Exercise Science, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa 52242Published Online:01 Nov 2003https://doi.org/10.1152/ajpregu.00452.2003MoreSectionsPDF (59 KB)Download PDF ToolsExport citationAdd to favoritesGet permissionsTrack citations the rhythm of the heart has not only fascinated cardiologists but also inspired poets and musicians. Indeed, the periodic beat of the heart was used to define the speed of music. In music notation, the traditional Italian term "moderato" originally referred to one beat of the measure per walking pace (76-80 paces/min) or heartbeat (∼72 beats/min). The use of the heartbeat to define the speed of music may imply that the periodicity of the beat of the heart is very constant. However, this is not necessarily the case. In fact, loss of heart rate variability can indicate severe cardiovascular diseases and reliably predict poor outcome of such conditions (18, 22, 27, 47a). This In Focus article reviews sources of heart rate variability, its role as a prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, and its application in estimation of cardiac autonomic nervous system activity. All of these topics have been addressed intensely in articles published in the American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology during the last two years. In healthy subjects, the sinoatrial node located at the posterior wall of the right atrium initiates each beat of the heart. Due to the unstable membrane potential of the myocytes located in this region, action potentials are generated periodically at a fairly constant frequency. This relatively constant frequency generated by the autorhythmicity of the sinoatrial node is modulated by many factors that add variability to the heart rate signal at different frequencies. According to the Task Force of The European Society of Cardiology and The North American Society of Pacing and Electrophysiology (47a) these frequencies are classified into 1) ultra-low frequencies (ULF; >5-h cycle length) that include the circadian rhythm (6, 9, 34, 54); 2) very low frequencies (VLF; >25-s cycle length) that are supposed to be affected by temperature regulation (1, 7, 34, 52, 54) and humoral systems (9, 36); 3) low frequencies (LF; >6-s cycle length in humans) that are sensitive to changes in cardiac sympathetic (and presumably parasympathetic) nerve activity (27, 30); and 4) high frequencies (HF; 2.5- to 6.0-s cycle length in humans) that are synchronized to the respiratory rhythm (5) and are primarily modulated by cardiac parasympathetic innervation (38).The most prominent oscillation in the ULF band of the heart rate spectrum is the circadian rhythm. The autonomic nervous system contributes significantly to circadian heart rate variability. Using long-term recordings in conscious rabbits, Barrett et al. (6) demonstrated a strong circadian rhythm in heart rate, mean arterial blood pressure, renal blood flow, and renal sympathetic nerve activity. The importance of this study is that it clearly demonstrates that sympathetic nerve discharges exhibit a strong circadian rhythmicity. The paraventricular nucleus of the hypothalamus (PVN) appears to play a central role in mediating the circadian rhythm of autonomic nervous system activity. First, GABAergic and glutamatergic neurons project from the suprachiasmatic nuclei of the hypothalamus (SCN) to spinal-projecting neurons of the PVN (12). The SCN is the major central oscillator that triggers the day/night cycle. It receives photic input from the retina (47) and drives many neuroendocrine, metabolic, autonomic, and behavioral circadian rhythms (14, 16, 21, 31, 35, 44, 46, 50). In addition, microinjections of the inhibitory neurotransmitter GABA into the PVN of anesthetized rats elicit dose-dependent decreases in renal sympathetic nerve activity, whereas bicuculline (a GABA antagonist) increases renal sympathetic nerve activity (56). Second, from the PVN, neurons project to the nucleus of the solitary tract (that integrates inputs from the baroreceptors), the nucleus ambiguus (origin of preganglionic parasympathetic neurons to the heart), the rostroventrolateral medulla (location of sympathetic premotor neurons), and the intermediolateral cell column of the thoracolumbar spinal cord (location of preganglionic sympathetic neurons). Thus PVN neurons can modulate autonomic nervous system activity by sending inputs to major sites of autonomic nervous system regulation. As an example, a pivotal role of the PVN for sympathoexcitation during parturition was recently demonstrated in sheep. The increase in sympathetic nerve activity that accompanies birth in maternal animals was prevented by stereotactic lesioning of the PVN (43). Taken together, a major component of the circadian heart rate variability is elicited by diurnal fluctuations in autonomic nervous system activity, generated by corresponding fluctuations of neuronal activity within the PVN, which depend on circadian inputs originating from the SCN.It has been suggested that thermoregulation affects VLF heart rate variability (10, 26). Cooling the heart causes bradycardia, a mechanism used in heart surgeries. Conversely, fever is known to increase heart rate. Raising body core temperature from 36.0 to 36.6°C caused an increase in heart rate by almost 40 beats/min in male subjects (1), whereas acutely reducing ambient temperature from thermoneutral conditions (35°C) to 29, 23, and 17°C, reduced heart rate from 400 to 250 beats/min in 8-day-old rats (7). In addition, lowering temperature in the isolated working rat heart from 37 to 31°C reduced heart rate from 332 to 215 beats/min and markedly increased heart rate variability (28), indicating that parts of the temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability are independent from the autonomic nervous system. In contrast to the tachycardia that accompanies acute elevations in temperature, chronically raising ambient temperature in adult rodents from a standard housing temperature of 21-23°C to thermoneutral conditions (29-30°C) reduced heart rate by roughly 50 beats/min in rats (34) and by 200-300 beats/min in mice (54). The authors of these articles (34, 54) suggested that standard housing temperatures are associated with cold stress that causes parallel activation of brown adipose tissue, cardiac, and vasomotor sympathetic drives that elicits nonshivering thermogenesis and tonically elevates heart rate and arterial blood pressure. These and other studies indicate that both direct effects of temperature on pacemaker activity of the sinus node (28) and indirect effects mediated via the autonomic nervous system (11, 25, 51, 55) mediate temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability. Thus fluctuation in temperature is an important source of heart rate variability that should not be underestimated. In a more recent study, this was taken into account by core body temperature correction of heart rate variability (3).Endocrine factors affecting heart rate variability include thyroxine, reproductive hormones, the renin-angiotensin system, steroids, and others. Chronic subcutaneous infusion of angiotensin II in rats markedly increased blood pressure and heart rate variability, expressed as standard deviation (9). In contrast, chronic corticosterone treatment is likely to reduce baroreflex-mediated heart rate variability, because baroreceptor-heart rate (39) and baroreceptor-renal sympathetic nerve activity reflex sensitivity (41) were blunted in chronically corticosterone-treated rats. Furthermore, an interaction between angiotensin II and glucocorticoids was recently described. Intracerebro-ventricular microinjections of angiotensin II AT1 receptor antagonists caused marked decreases in mean blood pressure and heart rate in rats chronically treated with corticosterone but not in control animals (40). This interaction is likely to take place in the central nervous system, because peripheral angiotensin II AT1 receptor blockade did not alter the effects of betamethasone treatment on blood pressure, heart rate, and baroreceptor-heart rate reflex sensitivity in newborn lambs (42).Adenosine is a substance less known to affect heart rate variability. It is produced locally in the heart (53) and binds to A1-adenosinergic receptors, which are among the earliest expressed G protein-coupled receptors in the heart (36). The A1-adenosinergic agonist N6-cyclopentyladenosine dose dependently reduced heart rate in murine embryos, whereas 1,3-dipropyl-8-cyclopentylxanthine, an A1-adenosinergic antagonist, increased heart rate (36). Adenosine also exerts central nervous system effects in various brain areas (15, 20). Microinjections of adenosine into the nucleus of the solitary tract of awake rats caused dose-dependent changes in heart rate: low doses (0.01 nmol) produced a bradycardic response, whereas high doses (2.5-5.0 nmol) elicited a tachycardic response (15). Thus adenosine may indeed be involved in the regulation of heart rate and modulate heart rate variability via local cardiac and central nervous system effects. It has been proposed that the intrinsic cardiac nervous system plays an active role in regulating cardiac function (4, 37, 45, 57). This nervous system consists of sympathetic and parasympathetic neurons and interconnecting local circuits (37). Neurons in the canine right atrial ganglionated plexus (RAGP) spontaneously generate activity even after chronic cardiac autonomic denervation (45). Right atrial neurons in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery generated spontaneous activity that was unrelated to the cardiac cycle but sensitive to changes in systemic arterial pressure, indicating that these neurons receive pressure-sensitive sensory inputs (4). In addition, it has been suggested that substance P acts as a neuromodulator and neurotransmitter in intracardiac ganglia of the guinea pig, modulates the response to vagal inputs, and triggers action potentials at the site of parasympathetic ganglia independent of acetylcholine (57). Furthermore, the right atrial (RAGP) and the posterior atrial ganglionated plexus (PAGP) appear to have different functions. Ablation of the PAGP reduced vagally mediated bradycardia by 26%, whereas RAGP ablation completely abolished this response. Inhibition of sympathetically mediated tachycardia by vagal stimulation was attenuated by ablation of either plexus (37). Thus parasympathetic efferent neurons are primarily located in the RAGP, whereas prejunctional parasympathetic-sympathetic interactions also involve neurons within the PAGP (37). The spontaneous activity of neurons in the intrinsic cardiac nervous system, even after cardiac denervation (45), suggests an active role of this system in regulating heart rate. However, the impact of the intrinsic cardiac nervous system on heart rate variability remains to be elucidated. The importance of the autonomic nervous system for heart rate variability in humans becomes apparent in patients following cardiac transplantation, in whom heart rate variability is markedly reduced (49). Although reinnervation is possible after months and years, initially transplanted hearts can be considered to be denervated. Thus the reduced heart rate variability in cardiac transplanted patients (49) underlines the importance of an intact autonomic innervation for spontaneously occurring heart rate variability. A major component of the chronotropic effect of the autonomic nervous system is linked to cAMP. Intracellular cAMP increases the inward current of Na+ (funny current, If), which determines the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization that precedes each action potential. The activity of adenylate cyclase and thus intracellular cAMP levels are increased by stimulation of sympathetic β1-adrenergic receptors and decreased (via a Gi protein) by stimulation of parasympathetic muscarinic receptors. Thus cardiac sympathetic innervation increases the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization and accelerates heart rate, while cardiac parasympathetic innervation elicits opposite effects. Interestingly, parasympathetic-mediated changes in heart rate occur much faster than sympathetic-mediated effects on heart rate (27, 30, 47a). As a result, cardiac sympathetic nervous system activity can only affect LF components of heart rate variability, whereas the parasympathetic nervous system can also modulate HF components. A hitherto unsolved question in this context is if the rapid heart rate response to parasympathetic stimulation compared with the slow effect of sympathetic inputs is due to 1) different kinetics of β1-adrenergic vs. muscarinic receptors, 2) different kinetics of adenylate cyclase vs. phosphodiesterase, the enzyme that cleaves cAMP, or 3) fast parasympathetic-mediated opening of KACh channels (via muscarinic receptors and a GK protein). Support for the latter possibility comes from experiments in the rabbit sinoatrial node that demonstrated that activation of KACh channels contributes to the initial slowing of heart rate as a result of vagal stimulation (8).On the basis of the different frequency response characteristics of sympathetic and parasympathetic modulation of heart rate, frequency analysis of heart rate variability is often used as a tool to determine "autonomic balance" or sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system activity (27, 47a). As an example, the wavelet transform was recently used to determine cardiac autonomic responses to reperfusion in patients with thrombolysis after coronary thrombosis. Depending on the location of the infarct, marked alterations in LF or HF spectral power of heart rate or in the LF/HF ratio was observed in all successful reperfusions (48).The HF component corresponds to the frequency of respiration and is driven by the vagus as indicated by the strong respiratory pattern of cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus (38). The LF component has been ascribed to sympathetic modulation of cardiac pacemaker activity, because a variety of studies demonstrated that acute interventions that increase sympathetic nervous system activity, such as orthostatic perturbations (17, 19, 33), mental stress (32), or handgrip exercise (13, 24) increases LF spectral power of heart rate (27, 30). In addition to acute perturbations of cardiac sympathetic nerve activity, feedback oscillations generated by the baroreceptor reflex also appear to contribute to LF spectral power of heart rate as it was demonstrated that sinoaortic denervation markedly reduces the LF component (27, 30). Despite the strong modulation of heart rate by the autonomic nervous system, the LF and HF spectral components of heart rate variability may not always be very reliable markers for cardiac sympathetic and parasympathetic "tone" (30). In a recent study, muscle sympathetic nerve activity was recorded together with heart rate variability during application of lower body negative pressure that is known to increase muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17, 33). At higher levels of lower body negative pressure (-15 mmHg), both muscle sympathetic nerve activity and relative LF spectral power of heart rate increased significantly, whereas HF spectral power decreased (17). These findings suggest that LF spectral power reflects cardiac sympathetic "tone." However, no correlation within subjects was found between changes in LF/HF ratio and muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17). Thus heart rate variability does not reliably reflect the sympathetic response to orthostatic stress. Respiration-related fluctuation of heart rate (respiratory sinus arrhythmia) is probably the most often investigated component of heart rate variability, as it is believed that this component reflects respiration-driven vagal modulation of sinus arrhythmia (27). In a recent study, Rentero et al. (38) recorded the electrical activity from cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus. Firing of these neurons was modulated by the central respiratory cycle. This and other studies support the view that respiratory sinus arrhythmia is generated by central coupling of the respiratory oscillator with autonomic centers in the brain stem. However, a mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling as a source of respiration-related heart rate variability has also been suggested (5). The Bainbridge reflex causes a tachycardia in response to hypervolemia. This reflex is initiated by atrial mechanoreceptors and uses efferent sympathetic and parasympathetic pathways to modulate heart rate in response to changes in central venous pressure (23). Thus respiratory changes in central blood volume cause corresponding respiratory fluctuations in cardiac autonomic nervous system activity via the Bainbridge reflex. Only the parasympathetic component of the efferent pathway of the reflex can contribute to respiratory sinus arrhythmia, because sympathetic actions on heart rate are too damped to follow the respiratory frequency. The gain and phase of the transfer function between respiratory changes in lung volume and R-R intervals of the ECG were calculated in human subjects during graded changes in central blood volume (5). At the respiratory frequency, the phase was -180 degree, indicating that an inspiratory increase in central blood volume was associated with a decrease in R-R interval (increase in heart rate). Furthermore, the gain of the transfer function at the respiratory frequency steadily increased with increasing central volumes (except at the highest volume). Both of these findings confirm the presence of the Bainbridge reflex in humans (5). Thus, in addition to the central coupling of respiratory oscillators with cardiovascular centers, the Bainbridge reflex may contribute to respiration-related heart rate variability by mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling. There is general agreement that low heart rate variability is an unfavorable prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, such as diabetic autonomic neuropathy, hypertension, myocardial infarction, and heart failure (18, 22, 27, 29, 47a). Heart rate variability (variance of R-R intervals) was reduced in patients with mild hypertension (29) compared with normal values (1,134 ± 202 vs. 3,466 ± 1,018 ms2) provided by the Task Force (47a). In the rat model of myocardial infarction-induced congestive heart failure, Francis and colleagues (18) reported loss of spontaneous heart rate variability 6 wk after coronary artery ligation. Interestingly, reduced heart rate variability was also observed in a rat model of depression that is based on chronic (4 wk) mild stress application (22). Because depression is an independent risk factor for coronary artery disease, this finding may realistically model a human disease process. The reduction in heart rate variability was abolished by β-adrenergic receptor blockade, indicating that the reduced heart rate variability in this model of depression is related to elevated cardiac sympathetic tone (22).In summary, heart rate variability is generated by multiple factors not exclusively limited to the autonomic nervous system. Specific frequency components of heart rate variability mirror acute perturbations of the autonomic nervous system but do not always reflect autonomic nervous system activity. Simple statistics of heart rate variability, such as the standard deviation of R-R intervals in the ECG, can reliably predict the prognosis of cardiovascular diseases.I thank Dr. R. McAllen for critically reviewing the manuscript. References 1 Aoki K, Stephens DP, and Johnson JM. Diurnal variation in cutaneous vasodilator and vasoconstrictor systems during heat stress. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R591-R595, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar3 Aoyagi N, Ohashi K, and Yamamoto Y. Frequency characteristics of long-term heart rate variability during constant-routine protocol. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: R171-R176, 2003.Link | ISI | Google Scholar4 Arora RC, Hirsch GM, Johnson Hirsch K, Hancock Friesen C, and Armour JA. Function of human intrinsic cardiac neurons in situ. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1736-R1740, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar5 Barbieri R, Triedman JK, and Saul JP. Heart rate control and mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling to assess central volume: a systems analysis. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: R1210-R1220, 2002.Link | ISI | Google Scholar6 Barrett CJ, Navakatikyan MA, and Malpas SC. Long-term control of renal blood flow: what is the role of the renal nerves? Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1534-R1545, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar7 Blumberg MS, Knoot TG, and Kirby RF. Neural and hormonal control of arterial pressure during cold exposure in un-anesthetized week-old rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R1514-R1521, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar8 Boyett MR, Kodama I, Honjo H, Arai A, Suzuki R, and Toyama J. Ionic basis of the chronotropic effect of acetylcholine on the rabbit sinoatrial node. Cardiovasc Res 29: 867-878, 1995.Crossref | PubMed | ISI | Google Scholar9 Braga and of on fluctuations and changes in blood pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and elicited of heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and modulation of sympathetic nerve activity to muscle in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and GABA mediate suprachiasmatic nucleus inputs to spinal-projecting paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and is not associated with of the exercise reflex in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google C, and Y. The effect of on the circadian control of human core body temperature is Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of adenosine receptors in the does not affect the in awake rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google JK, A, and circadian and during two Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and sympathetic nerve and heart rate spectral effects of lower body negative pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Francis Johnson and of heart failure after myocardial in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google A, and of lower body pressure on muscle sympathetic nerve activity response to Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Adenosine initial depression of in the rat in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google R, and and circadian phase in a diurnal the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Johnson alterations and autonomic in an model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google MA, and The interaction of the Bainbridge and in the conscious Res | ISI | Google A, and handgrip exercise arterial control of sympathetic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve regulation to is in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and in heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and function and cardiovascular interactions and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and interval variability in isolated working rat hearts at various conditions and Res | PubMed | Google A, A, and and autonomic of in patients with mild Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Malpas SC. Neural on cardiovascular and Am J Physiol Heart Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and thermoregulation in and rats in a Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and effects on reflex responses to mental stress in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and reflex during orthostatic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and responses to and are in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and and in a by cycle. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of humoral heart rate regulation in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Armour and within the intrinsic cardiac nervous system contribute to chronotropic regulation. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: 2003.Link | ISI | Google Rentero N, A, and McAllen of cardiac vagal motoneurons in rat nucleus ambiguus. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of heart rate in conscious rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and central actions of angiotensin to increase arterial pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of renal sympathetic nerve activity. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulation of cardiovascular and autonomic function in role of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Inhibition of sympathetic responses at birth in by of the paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and JP. pattern of during acute and chronic in conscious adult rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Armour and of chronic cardiac on of canine intracardiac neurons in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and levels and circadian rhythm of activity in the a model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve response of suprachiasmatic nucleus and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google

American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology · review · 309 citationsread the source →

Whither the Attenuated Psychosis Syndrome?

After 4 years of debate, a decision has been made. The attenuated psychosis syndrome (APS) will not be a coded diagnosis in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-5). Formerly known as the psychosis risk syndrome, the proposed diagnosis was based on criteria developed in the mid-1990s that were informed by a comprehensive review of retrospective studies on the prodromal phase of nonaffective psychosis.1 These criteria aimed to identify prospectively people in the prodrome of schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders and have been variously titled “ultra high risk (UHR),” “clinical high risk (CHR),” “at risk mental state (ARMS),” and the “prodromal stage,” and included a group with attenuated (subthreshold) positive psychotic symptoms.2 The criteria are associated with rates of onset of psychotic disorder substantially higher than in the general population3 and other clinical populations.4 A recent meta-analysis reported the rate of onset of a psychotic disorder to be 36% after 3 years.5 About 73% of those developing a psychotic disorder fulfill criteria for schizophrenia spectrum psychoses.6 It should be noted that these data are from treated samples consisting of patients referred to specialist clinical services. Despite the consistent finding that there is a high risk of developing a psychotic disorder associated with the APS group,5 there has been considerable controversy around the idea of formally codifying it into a DSM5 diagnosis. Indeed, we, the authors of this communication, all active researchers in the area, have had differences in opinion about the merits of including APS as a new diagnosis in the DSM.7–12 One issue debated was the tension between the possibility of early intervention to prevent progression of disorder vs potential unnecessary diagnosis and treatment of what might be a self-limiting phase. The possibility of stigma and discrimination was also raised.10,11 Some speculated that a formal diagnosis would be assumed to equate to an indication for antipsychotic medication and so increase the likelihood of antipsychotic prescription.11 Others argued that the absence of an APS diagnosis has led to some clinicians using the term psychosis NOS (not otherwise specified), which may lead to antipsychotic prescription. The APS as an alternative to this diagnosis could then actually reduce antipsychotic prescribing.9,12 Importantly, an APS diagnosis will enable evidence-based treatments to be developed, including psychological therapies, and could therefore decrease antipsychotic use.12 Ultimately, the decision to exclude APS as a coded diagnosis was made not in response to any of the above issues or in the light of data addressing the principal disputes but because data on the diagnostic reliability of APS in clinical practice were limited and inconclusive. Following this decision, some critics have been quick to denounce the whole APS/ultra high-risk/clinical high-risk/prodromal concept.13–15 We, therefore, feel it is timely, as a group involved in high-risk (prodromal) research, to document some points of consensus between us and highlight areas for future research. Attempts to recognize the prodrome of schizophrenia prospectively have been active for nearly 20 years.2 Many samples of persons meeting high-risk criteria have been seen and evaluated. A strong consensus exists that individuals meeting APS criteria (which includes a criterion for help-seeking) are symptomatic and in need of clinical care.16–18 People meeting the criteria do in fact fulfill the broad definition of mental disorder: “a clinically significant behavioral and psychological syndrome or pattern … that is associated with present distress … or disability … or with a significantly increased risk of suffering death, pain, disability, or an important loss of freedom,”19 (p. xxi). Thus, treatment is clearly justified, regardless of the justification of reduction of risk or prevention. We agree that this treatment should include monitoring of mental state, supportive therapy, and attention to current practical needs. Cognitive therapy and omega-3 fatty acids may also be helpful. On current evidence, antipsychotic medication is no more effective than other more benign treatments and so is typically not recommended.20 A second point of consensus is that people meeting APS criteria have a greatly increased risk of developing a psychotic disorder within a brief time frame.3,5,21,22 Despite evidence that the transition rate (conversion from high-risk state to first-episode psychosis) may be declining in the short term23 and the finding of low rate of psychosis in recent intervention trials,24,25 its magnitude is similar to other risk syndromes,26,27 and still in the order of hundreds fold above the risk of the general population. Given this, we agree that regular assessment of mental state to detect first episode of psychosis is indicated. The monitoring of mental state and early detection of psychosis allow prompt treatment and the minimization of the duration of untreated psychosis, which, if prolonged, is harmful to both patients and their families and is known to be associated with a poor outcome.28,29 Finally, we agree that more research into the APS is needed. We support the Psychotic Disorders Workgroup in its recommendation to include the APS as a category in the appendix (Section 3) of DSM-5 as a condition for further study. Collectively, we have devoted many hours into thinking about this condition. Through our research and clinical experience with these patients, we have evolved our thinking and our conceptualization of APS. Initially, the high-risk criteria were developed, as the name suggests, to detect individuals at high risk of psychotic disorder. However, the use of the criteria should not be thought of as identifying and treating an asymptomatic group at risk of a poor outcome, analogous to detecting and treating hyperlipidemia to prevent myocardial infarction (MI). APS patients are symptomatic and distressed. Thus, angina may be a more apt analogy. However, better still is to think of the criteria as detecting chest pain. The condition is distressing, symptomatic, and leads to help seeking. It may indicate the early signs or risk for a serious cardiac disease such as MI, a serious but noncardiac disease, such as pneumonia or a benign self-limiting condition such as esophageal spasm or costochondritis. Likewise, APS may indicate the early signs or risk for illnesses such as nonaffective and affective psychotic disorder, presence or risk for a serious but nonpsychotic illness such as severe unipolar depression, or it may indicate something that is not serious and which may resolve, with or without treatments such as psychological support, stress reduction family interventions, and practical help. This way of conceptualizing APS leads to many different paths for research. Suggestions for the future research agenda follow. Investigation of different outcomes in both the short and long term including psychotic disorders, nonpsychotic disorders, persistence or remission of APS, and social and cognitive functioning is needed. Refining risk factors for these different outcomes is another avenue of research. It may be that added criteria are necessary to enrich the sample for schizophrenia, such as basic and negative symptoms and decline in cognitive and social skills.30,31 Other methods of enrichment for other outcomes can also be studied, including multiple subclinical symptoms plus depression,32 presence of personality disorder, family history of mental disorder, and childhood trauma and adversity.33 Examining recovery and remission of the high-risk state as outcomes is another area that is currently understudied. Searching for predictors of these positive outcomes can then lead to adding such factors to ascertainment criteria as exclusions, which would result in a reduced false positive rate and increased positive predictive power. Examining associated neurobiological,34–36 cognitive,37 physiological,38 metabolic,39 and genetic40,41 associations with the APS and its different outcomes is needed so that subgroups can be more sharply delineated. Longitudinal follow-up is needed to elucidate whether the biological markers that are observed in the APS group are indicative of a trait vulnerability to psychotic disorder or whether they are state markers. Comparison with other psychiatric groups without APS will determine whether biological findings are specific to APS and represent a continuum with psychotic disorders such as schizophrenia or whether they are associated with general psychiatric distress. Research is also needed as to what harms and benefits are associated with an APS diagnosis. This should include assessing any perceived stigma, and comparison made with the stigma, stereotypes, and wish for social distance associated with overt psychiatric symptoms that may occur prior to help seeking and diagnosis. Whether clinical care that provides information, treatment, and hope of a good outcome can minimize stigma should also be studied. The effects of creating a new diagnosis, on patients, their families, and the wider health system, needs to be better understood. While reliability of assessment has been demonstrated in previous studies using structured interviews,42,43 the clinical utility and reliability of assessment in routine practice needs to be assessed and improved and the impact of the proposed diagnosis on prescribing practice examined. Investigation of factors that lead APS patients to seek help will also be useful. Currently, it is unclear how much of the distress that leads to seeking help is related to the psychotic-like symptoms or to associated nonpsychotic mental disorders, such as depression and anxiety.44 Little is known about the prevalence of APS in adolescent and adult clinical populations and in the general community and this also needs further study. Further intervention research is also needed. Omega-3 fatty acids have shown promise in reducing symptoms as well as decreasing the risk of transition to psychotic disorder in one study.45 This requires replication. Other novel treatments such as psychological treatments, vitamin D, glycine, and other neuroprotective agents are also worth testing. Finally, with increasing the knowledge of risk factors for different outcomes (see above), the APS model could also be extended to a more general a strategy for early intervention in a range of mental disorders. It may be that many disorders develop from initial nonspecific symptoms and syndromes, from a background of specific and nonspecific risk factors (such as genes and early environment). Worsening of symptoms and acquisition of new symptoms may occur, together with progressive neurobiological abnormalities, and related neurobehavioral deficits, until clear-cut recognizable mental disorders appear.46 Progression of symptoms and neurobiological abnormalities could continue after “threshold” diagnosis, with development of chronic symptoms, relapses, and ongoing functional deterioration. Transition from one stage to the next is not inevitable, either due to different risk and resilience factors or due to nonspecific or specific intervention. Thus, preventive possibilities exist across this spectrum of evolving illness. This concept of a pluripotent risk syndrome opens up a range of research possibilities. Studying genetic and environmental risk factors and gene and environment interactions for different outcomes, further work on resilience and protective factors, and examination of different trajectories are all future avenues of research. Whether any specific markers for particular course and outcome can be detected early is another area and leads to the possibility of early specific treatments. Novel methods such as multimodal imaging and neurocognitive analysis, single subject methods to predict individual disease course are also possible. APS concept remains a useful one. It identifies people with significant mental health problems that justify treatment in their own right, as well as having a higher likelihood of developing a psychotic disorder (mostly schizophrenia) within a few years. Research into this group will increase our understanding of psychotic-like symptoms and their trajectories and the emerging phase of psychotic disorders. The APS concept is consistent with the continuum view of psychosis and is probably a reflection of biologic reality. Outcomes other than psychotic disorder are also clearly worthy of study. The placement of APS in the DSM-5 appendix should be a clarion call to the field to focus attention on these patients and families in need. National Health and Medical Research Council (Australia) Senior Research Fellowship (#566593), and the Colonial Foundation (to A.R.Y.); National Institute for Mental Health (NIMH) grants (#5U01MH081857 and #5R01 MH061523 to B.A.C.); German Research Foundation, NARSAD, the German Ministry of Education and Research, the Faculty of Medicine of the University of Cologne (to A.B.); the National Institute for Health Research (NIHR) Birmingham and Black Country Collaboration for Leadership in Applied Health Research and Care (to M.B.); NIHR Biomedical Research Centre for Mental Health at the South London and Maudsley NHS Foundation Trust and Institute of Psychiatry King’s College London (to P.F.-P., P.M., and L.V.); the German Research Foundation, the European Commission, the German Ministry of Education and Research, and the Faculty of Medicine of the University of Cologne (to J.K.); the University of Basel (to S.B. and A.R.-R.), Swiss National Foundation, Stanley Foundation, European Union FP7, Österreichische Forschungsförderungsgesellschaft, Foundation Alamaya (to A.R.-R.); NIMH (U01 MH081928, P50 MH080272), Massachusetts Department of Mental Health, R21 MH093294, R01 MH096027 (to L.S.); and NIMH and the Norwegian Research Council (to T.H.M.). A.B. and J.K. have received investigator-initiated grant support from Bristol Myers Squibb. A.B. has received speaker fees and travel support from Bristol Myers Squibb, Eli Lilly, Janssen Cilag, and Servier. P.D.M. has received unrestricted research grant support from Janssen Cilag, honoraria for educational events and consultancies from Janssen-Cilag and Roche, and unrestricted Research Grant Support from Astra Zeneca. As these sources of funding have not influenced the content of this article, all authors have declared that there are no conflicts of interest in relation to the subject of this article.

Schizophrenia Bulletin · 97 citationsread the source →

Adjustment modes in the trajectory of progressive multiple sclerosis: a qualitative study and conceptual model.

Objective: We examined cognitive and behavioural challenges and adaptations for people with progressive multiple sclerosis (MS) and developed a preliminary conceptual model of changes in adjustment over time. Design: Using theoretical sampling, 34 semi-structured interviews were conducted with people with MS. Participants were between 41 and 77 years of age. Thirteen were diagnosed with primary progressive MS and 21 with secondary progressive MS. Data were analysed using a grounded theory approach. Results: Participants described initially bracketing the illness off and carrying on their usual activities but this became problematic as the condition progressed and they employed different adjustment modes to cope with increased disabilities. Some scaled back their activities to live a more comfortable life, others identified new activities or adapted old ones, whereas at times, people disengaged from the adjustment process altogether and resigned to their condition. Relationships with partners, emotional reactions, environment and perception of the environment influenced adjustment, while people were often flexible and shifted among modes. Conclusions: Adjusting to a progressive condition is a fluid process. Future interventions can be tailored to address modifiable factors at different stages of the condition and may involve addressing emotional reactions concealing/revealing the condition and perceptions of the environment.

Psychology & health · 13 citationsread the source →

International healthcare workers' experiences and perceptions of the 2022 multi-country mpox outbreak.

In May 2022, the most widespread outbreak of sustained transmission of mpox outside of countries historically affected countries in Western and Central Africa occurred. We aimed to examine the personal and clinical experiences of international healthcare workers (HCWs) during this public health emergency. We conducted an international cross-sectional survey study between August and October 2022, examining the experiences and perceptions of HCWs clinically involved in the 2022 mpox response. Respondents were recruited via an international network of sexual health and HIV clinicians responding to mpox and promoted through clinical associations and social media. Survey domains included: clinical workload; preparedness; training and support at work; psychological well-being and vaccination. 725 multi-national healthcare workers across 41 countries were included in the analysis. 91% were physicians specialised in Sexual Health or Infectious Diseases; with 34% (n = 247) of all respondents involved in mpox policy. A substantial proportion of respondents (n = 296, 41%) reported working longer hours during the mpox outbreak, with no concomitant removal of other clinical responsibilities. 30% (n = 218) of respondents reported that they had never heard of mpox before the outbreak and over 25% of the respondents reported that they had misdiagnosed someone initially. This culminated in a high prevalence of moral distress at thirty percent. Less than 9% of HCWs in the region of the Caribbean, Central America and South America had been offered a vaccine as compared to almost one-third in the other regions. Where offered, there were high levels of uptake across all regions. The findings highlight a critical need for addressing the profound gaps in HCW knowledge about re-emerging diseases with pandemic potential. Strengthening the resilience of global health systems and prioritising internationally coordinated approaches to global vaccine deployment is imperative.

PLOS global public health · 2 citationsread the source →

Effectiveness and tolerability of antifibrotics in rheumatoid arthritis-associated interstitial lung disease.

Objective: Our aim was to investigate the effectiveness and tolerability of antifibrotics in a real-world cohort of patients with rheumatoid arthritis-associated interstitial lung diseases (RA-ILD). Methods: In this retrospective cohort study, we identified RA-ILD patients initiating antifibrotics at Mass General Brigham Integrated Health Care System, a large multi-hospital healthcare system in Boston, MA, USA. We used electronic query to identify all patients with at least 2 RA diagnosis codes and a prescription for either nintedanib or pirfenidone (2014-2023). All analyzed patients met 2010 American College of Rheumatology/European Alliance of Associations for Rheumatology classification criteria for RA and had definite RA-ILD according to Bongartz criteria. Data regarding pulmonary function test (PFT) results, adverse events (AEs), tolerability, and clinical data were collected. A linear mixed model with random intercept was used to compare the within-patient trajectory of the percent predicted forced vital capacity (FVCpp) within 18-months before to 18-months after antifibrotic initiation among those with these PFT data. Lung transplant-free survival and drug retention was estimated in a Kaplan-Meier analysis and a Cox regression analysis was performed to identify independent baseline factors associated with lung transplant or mortality. Results: We analyzed 74 patients with RA-ILD that initiated antifibrotics (mean age 67.8 years, 53 % male); 40 patients initiated nintedanib and 34 initiated pirfenidone. Median follow-up was 89 weeks (min 4, max 387). There was a significant improvement in the estimated slope of FVCpp after antifibrotic initiation (-0.3 % per year after initiation compared to -6.2 % per year before antifibrotic initiation, p = 0.03). Nintedanib and pirfenidone had similar FVCpp trajectory. Twenty-six patients (35 %) died and 4 (5 %) had undergone lung transplantation during follow-up. Male sex and heavy smoking were each associated with the composite outcome of lung transplant or mortality. AEs were reported in 41 (55 %) patients, with gastrointestinal (GI) AEs being most common (n = 30). The initial antifibrotic was discontinued in 34 (46 %) patients mostly due to GI AEs (n = 19). The median drug retention time was 142 weeks (95 %CI 56, 262) with no difference between nintedanib and pirfenidone (p = 0.68). Conclusion: In this first real-world study of antifibrotic use dedicated to RA-ILD, antifibrotic initiation was associated with a modestly improved trajectory of FVCpp. AEs were frequently reported, particularly GI, and discontinuation was common. However, lung transplant and mortality rates were still high, emphasizing the need for further therapeutic strategies in patients with severe RA-ILD. These real-world data complement previous trial data that investigated efficacy and safety.

Seminars in arthritis and rheumatism · 32 citationsread the source →

Social inequalities in multimorbidity, frailty, disability, and transitions to mortality: a 24-year follow-up of the Whitehall II cohort study.

Background: Social inequalities in mortality persist in high-income countries with universal health care, and the mechanisms by which these inequalities are generated remain unclear. We aimed to examine whether social inequalities were present before or after the onset of adverse health conditions (multimorbidity, frailty, and disability). Methods: Our analysis was based on data from the ongoing Whitehall II cohort study, which enrolled British civil servants aged 35-55 years in 1985-88. Participants were assessed for three indicators of socioeconomic status (education, occupational position, and literacy) at age 50 years. Participants underwent clinical examinations (in 2002-04, 2007-09, 2012-13, and 2015-16) for assessment of frailty (two or more of low physical activity, slow walking speed, poor grip strength, weight loss, and exhaustion) and disability (two or more difficulties in bathing, dressing, going to the toilet, transferring, feeding, and walking). In addition, electronic health records were used to assess the incidence of multimorbidity (two or more of diabetes, coronary heart disease, stroke, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, depression, arthritis, cancer, dementia, and Parkinson's disease) and mortality. In analyses adjusted for sociodemographic factors, we used multistate models to examine social inequalities in transitions from healthy state to adverse health conditions and subsequently to mortality. Findings: Of 10 308 individuals in the Whitehall II study cohort, 6425 had relevant data available at 50 years and to the end of follow-up on Aug 31, 2017, and were included in our analysis. Participants were followed up for a median of 23·6 years (IQR 19·6-28·9). 1694 (26·4%) of 6425 participants developed multimorbidity, 1733 (27·0%) became frail, 692 (10·8%) had a disability, and 611 (9·5%) died. Multimorbidity (hazard ratio [HR] 4·12 [95% CI 3·41-4·98]), frailty (HR 2·38 [95% CI 1·93-2·93]), and disability (HR 1·73 [95% CI 1·34-2·22]) were associated with increased risk of mortality; these associations were not modified by socioeconomic status. In multistate models, occupation was the socioeconomic status indicator that was most strongly associated with inequalities in the transition from healthy state to multimorbidity (HR 1·54 [95% CI 1·37-1·73]), to frailty (HR 2·08 [95% CI 1·85-2·33]), and to disability (HR 1·44 [95% CI 1·18-1·74]). Socioeconomic status indicators did not affect transitions to mortality in those with multimorbidity, frailty, or disability. Interpretation: Socioeconomic status affects the risk of multimorbidity, frailty, and disability, but does not affect the risk of mortality after the onset of these adverse health conditions. Therefore, primary prevention is key to reducing social inequalities in mortality. Of the three adverse health conditions, multimorbidity had the strongest association with mortality, making it a central target for improving population health. Funding: UK Medical Research Council; National Institute on Aging, National Institutes of Health; British Heart Foundation.

The Lancet. Public health · 239 citationsread the source →

Combat sports and wellbeing: advancing health and inclusion in athletes and practitioners. An opinion paper

Historically, combat sports have been predominantly conceptualized within the framework of elite competition, emphasizing physical aptitude, technical proficiency, and strategic execution (1-3). Despite their traditional and peculiar constitutions and developments, disciplines such as judo, karate, taekwondo, wrestling, fencing, boxing, and mixed martial arts have commonly been associated with high-performance athletes striving for competitive excellence on national and international stages (1, 4-6). However, contemporary discourse increasingly recognizes their expansive role in contributing to physical and psychological well-being, and social inclusion of the practitioners (7, 8). This paradigmatic shift underscores the capacity of combat sports to function as inclusive and accessible modalities for fostering multidimensional health benefits across diverse populations, including individuals with disabilities and other marginalized groups (9-13).The interdisciplinary exploration of physical activity and health highlights the intricate interrelationship between structured sports engagement and holistic well-being (14). Whilst conventional team and individual sports have long been acknowledged for their physiological and psychosocial benefits, combat sports exhibit distinct characteristics that might amplify these advantages (15, 16). Within combat sports, the synergistic interplay of rigorous physical conditioning, the cognitive engagement, adherence to rules, competition dynamics, respect, externalizing emotions regulation, are intertwined with pedagogical and philosophical values, thus presenting a unique framework for enhancing psychological resilience, cognitive adaptability, and emotional control. Consequently, the systematic practice of combat sports has been increasingly examined as a way of promoting mental health, stress modulation, and social cohesion (17, 18).The inclusive nature of many combat sports programmes further accentuates their relevance in dismantling stereotypes, facilitating integration, and fostering equity and social integration (19-21). In fact, they demonstrated significant adaptability to accommodate individuals with disabilities (e.g., physical impairments, developmental, emotional, intellectual disorders), thereby ensuring equitable access and fostering empowerment (9, 22). Adapted judo, para-taekwondo, and other modified combat disciplines provide individuals with disabilities a structured platform to engage in physical activity, cultivate self-efficacy, and develop meaningful social connections within a supportive and adaptive environment (23). From a public health perspective, the integration of combat sports within community-based health initiatives offers a compelling opportunity to engage populations that may not traditionally participate in structured physical activity programmes (7, 8, 19). The distinctive accessibility of combat sports, which cater to practitioners of all skill levels (e.g., from novices to elite athletes) sets them apart from many other sports. While their structured progression, adaptability, and emphasis on holistic development make them a viable option for lifelong and intergenerational participation (19, 24, 25), the mentorship and pedagogical frameworks cultivate positive role modeling, discipline, and intrinsic motivation, which are integral for sustaining long-term adherence to health-promoting behaviors (8).Furthermore, the intersection between combat sports and mental health has increasingly emerged as a focal point within academic and clinical research (17) with empirical evidence suggesting an association between participation and enhanced self-regulation and self-efficacy, and reduction in anxiety and depressive symptomatology (8, 26, 27). In necessitating sustained focus, adaptability, and emotional equilibrium, combat sports inherently require cognitive and affective demands, which align closely with established psychological frameworks that underpin mental well-being (28, 29). Moreover, the integration of mindfulness techniques, stress management strategies, and resilience-building paradigms within combat sports training substantiates their potential as a non-pharmacological intervention for addressing various mental health challenges (e.g., autism spectrum and oppositional defiant disorders) (30, 31).Despite these advantages, the discourse surrounding combat sports and well-being necessitates a critical examination of inherent risks and potential challenges. Issues related to injury risk, hypercompetitive environments, eating disorders, sexual harassment, and the psychological stressors associated with high-intensity training warrant careful scrutiny (32-36). The implementation of evidence-based injury prevention protocols, the establishment of ethically responsible coaching methodologies, and the promotion of safe training environments are imperative to ensure that the benefits of combat sports are maximized while minimizing adverse outcomes. Against this backdrop, this opinion paper seeks to examine the role of combat sports in advancing health and social inclusion among athletes and practitioners. Through a synthesis of contemporary empirical findings, theoretical paradigms, and applied insights, this paper aims to contribute to the evolving discourse on the potential of combat sports as a catalyst for holistic well-being. By delineating the multidimensional impact of combat sports on physical, psychological, and social health, this paper endeavors to underscore their transformative potential as an instrument for fostering individual and community well-being within different populations. DiscussionWhilst an expanding body of research and an evolution in scholarly discourse is recognizing the combat sports’ broader implications for holistic well-being (30, 37), a rigorous evaluation of the investigation methodologies, the validity of hypotheses, and the translational potential of recent findings is necessary to contextualize their significance within the sports and public health sciences, considering their strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (Figure 1).----------------------------------------ADD FIGURE 1 ABOUT HERE----------------------------------------Empirical evidence robustly shows the positive impact of combat sports on physical fitness, motor coordination, and cardiovascular health (3, 38). These benefits are attributed to the high-intensity, intermittent nature of combat sports training, which enhances aerobic and anaerobic endurance, muscular strength, and neuromuscular control (39). However, concerns regarding injury risk, particularly in striking and contact-intensive disciplines such as boxing, taekwondo, and mixed martial arts, necessitate continued research into injury mitigation strategies, particularly those targeting concussion and repetitive head trauma (6, 35, 40, 41). Moreover, many combat sports have developed styles with reduced or simulated contact to minimize injury risk. For example, the French "boxe éducative" emphasizing technique and control, penalizing any violent behaviors (42) and the value and application of kata (i.e., forms; prearranged, pattern practices) to learning and adopting judo technique in a safe way educating the athlete culturally, to enrich her/him as a person (43).Beyond physical health, recent studies highlight the psychological benefits of combat sports, including reductions in anxiety and depression and improvements in self-efficacy, emotional regulation, resilience, and stress management (27, 44-47). Therefore, combat sports-based interventions for individuals with mental health conditions have yielded promising outcomes (23). Despite these encouraging findings, variability in study designs, participant demographics, and intervention protocols limits their external validity, underscoring the need for further rigorously controlled investigations. Furthermore, some authors claimed that combat sport athletes might present symptoms of low energy availability and high anxiety levels associated with competition- and injury-related psychological stressors, deficits in executive functions and neuropsychological impairments associated with occurrence of concussions, disordered eating and eating disorders associated with weight-loss, and might suffer offensive, frightening, hostile, degrading, humiliating experiences, or sexual harassment, which urge safeguarding actions (32-36).The role of combat sports in fostering social inclusion has gained empirical support, particularly in programmes aimed at individuals with disabilities and marginalized communities (25, 48). For instance, a recent systematic review shows that judo interventions adapted for intellectual disabilities help improve social integration and self-perception and enhance participants' quality of life (49). The development of para-combat sports demonstrates enhanced physical and motor abilities while providing psychosocial benefits to various populations with different disabilities, promoting social integration, self-perception, and community belonging (50, 51). However, longitudinal research is needed to assess the long-term retention rates and sustainability of these benefits. Furthermore, there is a need of studies focused on the most appropriate adapted rules to achieve a fairer competition for ensuring a sense of success in individuals with physical, emotional, mental, hearing or visual impairments participating in adapted sports competitions at local, national, and international levels. Methodological approaches in combat sports research encompass experimental, longitudinal, qualitative, and systematic review designs. While randomized controlled trials remain the gold standard for establishing causality, their application in combat sports research is constrained by ethical concerns, logistical challenges, and the inherently dynamic nature of training environments (52, 53). Consequently, many studies rely on observational designs, which, despite their value in identifying associations, are susceptible to confounding variables and biases (24, 54).Qualitative methodologies have provided critical insights into the lived experiences of combat sports practitioners, offering perspectives on psychological and social dimensions that are often overlooked in quantitative studies (28). Ethnographic research has been particularly instrumental in elucidating the role of combat sports in shaping identity, discipline, and personal development (55). However, limitations in reproducibility and generalizability highlight the need for mixed-methods approaches to generate a more comprehensive understanding of combat sports' impact (25, 56).Additionally, the incorporation of biometric and neurocognitive assessments, such as heart rate variability analysis, functional MRI, and salivary cortisol measurements, has advanced our understanding of the physiological and psychological mechanisms underlying combat sports participation (47, 57, 58). Despite their objective precision, these techniques often face challenges related to cost, accessibility, and limited sample sizes, necessitating the development of scalable and cost-effective methodologies for broader research application. Finally, recent studies show that virtual reality (VR) technology and digital platforms are increasingly becoming part of combat sports training methods. Due to COVID-19 restrictions, martial arts schools and organizations implemented hybrid or online training models, which allowed athletes to stay engaged. VR boxing programmes provide users with virtual sparring simulations to enhance their motor skills without needing physical interaction. Initial results indicate that VR training enhances response behavior in karate athletes (59). Digital adaptations offer great potential, especially for people with limited mobility or remote locations. However, further studies are necessary to prove their enduring effects on physical health and psychological and social aspects (59-61).Strengths and Weaknesses of Scientific HypothesesThe hypothesis that combat sports confer multidimensional health benefits is strongly supported by empirical evidence spanning physiological, psychological, and social domains (8, 62-64). The integration of physical exertion, cognitive engagement, and structured discipline inherent in combat sports aligns with established theories of exercise psychology, neuroplasticity, and social identity formation (65, 66). This multidimensional perspective provides a robust theoretical foundation for advocating combat sports as a health-promoting activity. Nevertheless, several limitations warrant consideration. The heterogeneity of disciplines, which vary highly in intensity, contact level, and training methodologies, is often inadequately addressed in research, leading to overgeneralized conclusions (17, 39). Often underexamined, individual differences in personality, motivation, and previous trauma history may strongly moderate the psychological outcomes of combat sports participation (35, 67, 68).Additionally, a research focus is needed on concerns regarding the potential for adverse psychological effects (e.g., anxiety, depression, disordered eating behaviors, burnout, and decreased self-esteem), particularly in competitive environments where performance pressure, extreme weight-cutting practices, and aggressive coaching styles are prevalent (69, 70). Indeed, a balanced perspective that considers both benefits and risks is essential for the development of evidence-based recommendations (10, 71).Future DirectionsTo enhance the field, future research should prioritize well-structured longitudinal studies that assess the long-term impact of combat sports participation on physical, psychological, and social health. Standardization of outcome measures, intervention protocols, and participant demographics would facilitate cross-study comparisons and strengthen the reliability of findings (72, 73). Moreover, interdisciplinary collaborations incorporating sports science, psychology, and sociology could provide a more holistic perspective on combat sports' broader implications on practitioners (74).From a policy perspective, to yield valuable insights into combat sports’ practical applications research should investigate their efficacy within public health, educational, and rehabilitation initiatives, particularly for underserved and vulnerable populations (23, 75, 76).Furthermore, while safety remains a primary concern, advancements in protective equipment, training methodologies, education for athletes, coaches, referees and tournament directors, and regulatory frameworks should be continually evaluated to optimize benefits while mitigating risks (40, 41, 58, 77, 78). Ethical considerations, particularly concerning athlete well-being and inclusive participation, should remain a central focus in both research and practical implementation (17, 34, 36).Therefore, key research challenges to be addressed are: 1. Injury risk and safety: a need for injury prevention strategies, especially for concussions and head trauma in striking sports. 2. Psychological wellbeing: risks of stress, anxiety, burnout, and negative self-perception in competitive environments. 3. Inclusion and accessibility: a need for more research on long-term social and psychological benefits for marginalized groups and individuals with disabilities. 4. Methodological limitations: lack of standardized protocols, variability in study designs, and limited reproducibility of findings. 5. Ethical and regulatory issues: concerns over coaching practices, extreme weight-cutting, and athlete wellbeing in high-pressure environments. 6. Technological innovations: more research required on the effectiveness of VR and digital training tools in combat sports. 7. Public health and policy: exploration of combat sports' role in health initiatives, rehabilitation, and educational programs. ConclusionThe evolving discourse on combat sports highlights their potential as a multidimensional tool for well-being promotion. While a substantial body of evidence supports their benefits, a critical examination of methodological limitations, scientific hypotheses, and practical applications is essential for further refine our understanding and enhance their effectiveness. Finally, this article makes a significant contribution not only to the field of martial arts but also to public health and sports psychology. Its interdisciplinary approach calls for scientific collaboration and methodological rigor, reinforces the need for evidence-based policies and can serve as a valuable guide for researchers and policymakers looking to integrate combat sports into strategies for promoting health and social inclusion.

Frontiers in Psychology · 12 citationsread the source →

Intermittent fasting and health outcomes: an umbrella review of systematic reviews and meta-analyses of randomised controlled trials.

Background: Benefits of Intermittent fasting (IF) on health-related outcomes have been found in a range of randomised controlled trials (RCTs). Our umbrella review aimed to systematically analyze and synthesize the available causal evidence on IF and its impact on specific health-related outcomes while evaluating its evidence quality. Methods: We comprehensively searched the PubMed, Embase, Web of Science, and Cochrane databases (from inception up to 8 January 2024) to identify related systematic reviews and meta-analyses of RCTs investigating the association between IF and human health outcomes. We recalculated the effect sizes for each meta-analysis as mean difference (MD) or standardized mean difference (SMD) with corresponding 95% confidence intervals (CIs). Subgroup analyses were performed for populations based on three specific status: diabetes, overweight or obesity, and metabolic syndrome. The quality of systematic reviews was evaluated using A Measurement Tool to Assess Systematic Reviews (AMSTAR), and the certainty of evidence was assessed using the Grading of Recommendations, Assessment, Development, and Evaluations (GRADE) system. This study is registered with PROSPERO (CRD42023382004). Findings: A total of 351 associations from 23 meta-analyses with 34 health outcomes were included in the study. A wide range of outcomes were investigated, including anthropometric measures (n = 155), lipid profiles (n = 83), glycemic profiles (n = 57), circulatory system index (n = 41), appetite (n = 9), and others (n = 6). Twenty-one (91%) meta-analyses with 346 associations were rated as high confidence according to the AMSTAR criteria. The summary effects estimates were significant at p < 0.05 in 103 associations, of which 10 (10%) were supported by high certainty of evidence according to GRADE. Specifically, compared with non-intervention diet in adults with overweight or obesity, IF reduced waist circumference (WC) (MD = -1.02 cm; 95% CI: -1.99 to -0.06; p = 0.038), fat mass (MD = -0.72 kg; 95% CI: -1.32 to -0.12; p = 0.019), fasting insulin (SMD = -0.21; 95% CI: -0.40 to -0.02; p = 0.030), low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) (SMD = -0.20; 95% CI: -0.38 to -0.02; p = 0.027), total cholesterol (TC) (SMD = -0.29; 95% CI: -0.48 to -0.10; p = 0.003), and triacylglycerols (TG) (SMD = -0.23; 95% CI: -0.39 to -0.06; p = 0.007), but increased fat free mass (FFM) (MD = 0.98 kg; 95% CI: 0.18-1.78; p = 0.016). Of note, compared with the non-intervention diet, modified alternate-day fasting (MADF) reduced fat mass (MD = -0.70 kg; 95% CI: -1.38 to -0.02; p = 0.044). In people with overweight or obesity, and type 2 diabetes, IF increases high-density lipoprotein cholesterol (HDL-C) levels compared to continuous energy restriction (CER) (MD = 0.03 mmol/L; 95% CI: 0.01-0.05; p = 0.010). However, IF was less effective at reducing systolic blood pressure (SBP) than a CER diet in adults with overweight or obesity (SMD = 0.21; 95% CI: 0.05-0.36; p = 0.008). Interpretation: Our findings suggest that IF may have beneficial effects on a range of health outcomes for adults with overweight or obesity, compared to CER or non-intervention diet. Specifically, IF may decreased WC, fat mass, LDL-C, TG, TC, fasting insulin, and SBP, while increasing HDL-C and FFM. Notably, it is worth noting that the SBP lowering effect of IF appears to be weaker than that of CER. Funding: This work was supported by the National Key Research and Development Program of China (Q-JW), the Natural Science Foundation of China (Q-JW and T-TG), Outstanding Scientific Fund of Shengjing Hospital of China Medical University (Q-JW), and 345 Talent Project of Shengjing Hospital of China Medical University (T-TG).

EClinicalMedicine · 59 citationsread the source →

Volunteering in Young Adulthood: Complex Associations With Later Health and Well-Being Outcomes.

Purpose: To investigate whether changes in volunteering from adolescence to young adulthood are associated with subsequent health and well-being outcomes in adulthood. Design: Longitudinal cohort study. Setting: National Longitudinal Study of Adolescent to Adult Health. Subjects: U.S. adults from Wave IV (2008/2009; N = 12,234) and Wave V (2016-2018; N = 9,971). Measures: Any volunteering and nine types of volunteering (independent variables) and 41 health and well-being outcomes (dependent variables) using an outcome-wide approach with multiple linear-, logistic-, and generalized linear regressions. Results: Volunteering in young adulthood was associated with better health behaviors (e.g., 34% decreased risk of binge drinking, 95% CI [0.54, 0.81]) and improved psychosocial and civic outcomes (e.g., lower depressive symptoms (β = -0.08, 95% CI [-0.14, -0.02]) in adulthood. Volunteering showed little evidence of associations with other health and well-being outcomes (e.g., loneliness, (β = -0.04, 95% CI [-0.09, 0.01])). Assessing volunteering by organization types showed a range of positive and negative outcomes. For example, volunteering in hospitals/nursing homes was associated with a 36% increased risk of high cholesterol (95% CI [1.06, 1.73]) and volunteering with political clubs was associated with a 52% increased risk of an anxiety diagnosis (95% CI [1.13, 2.05]). Conclusion: Our findings suggest more work is needed to determine the conditions under which volunteering is health promoting and to minimize potential adverse effects associated with some types of volunteering.

American journal of health promotion : AJHP · 5 citationsread the source →

The Indirect Effect of Parental Intolerance of Uncertainty on Perinatal Mental Health via Mindfulness During COVID-19.

Objectives: The COVID-19 pandemic is associated with mental health difficulties, especially during pregnancy and early postpartum. Intolerance of uncertainty (IU) and reduced capacity for mindfulness-a protective factor for child-bearers-may be particularly relevant factors driving mental health problems given the unpredictable nature of the pandemic. The current study aims to shed light on modifiable paths to perinatal psychological distress by testing whether there is an indirect effect of IU on psychological symptoms through a perceived reduction in mindfulness during the pandemic. Methods: Pregnant individuals (67%, n = 133) and new mothers within 6 months postpartum (33%, n = 66) participated in a cross-sectional online survey assessing IU, current and retrospective pre-pandemic mindfulness (FFMQ), and psychological symptoms (anxiety, depression, somatization; BSI). Perceived change in mindfulness was captured by including retrospective mindfulness as a covariate in the PROCESS macro used for analyses. Results: Tests of the direct association between mindfulness, IU, and psychological symptoms showed significant effects of IU (b = 0.46, SE = 0.064; p < .001) and perceived decrease in mindfulness during the pandemic (b =  - 0.72, SE = 0.08, p < .001) on psychological symptoms (R 2 = .21-.34; F[2, 197] = 51.13-52.81, p < .001). The indirect effect of IU on symptoms via perceived decrease in mindfulness during the pandemic (b = 0.13, SE = 0.043, 95%CI [.060, .226]) was significant (R 2 = .41, F[3, 195] = 45.08, p < .001). Conclusions: Results suggest that mothers who are less able to tolerate uncertainty experience more psychological symptoms, in part due to perceived reduction in mindfulness during the pandemic. Future research should examine whether IU is a screening risk marker and target for mindfulness-based interventions to improve maternal well-being and family outcomes.

Mindfulness · 16 citationsread the source →

Palliative care experience and perceived gaps in training among transplant hepatology fellows: A national survey.

Despite the likely benefits of palliative care (PC) for patients with cirrhosis, physician experiences and perspectives about best practices are variable. We aimed to assess PC experience and gaps in training among transplant hepatology fellows. We conducted a national survey of all transplant hepatology fellows enrolled in accredited fellowship programs during the 2020-2021 academic year. We assessed the frequency of PC provision and comfort with physical and psychological symptom management, psychosocial care, communication skills, advance care planning, and end-of-life care. A total of 45 of 56 (79%) of transplant hepatology fellows responded to the survey; 50% (n = 22) were female. Most trained at centers performing over 100 transplants per year (67%, n = 29) distributed evenly across geographic regions. Most fellows (69%, n = 31) had a PC or hospice care rotation during residency, and 42% (n = 19) of fellows received education in PC during transplant hepatology fellowship. Fellows reported feeling moderately to very comfortable with communication skills such as breaking bad news (93%, n = 41) and leading family meetings (75%, n = 33), but nearly one-third (30%, n = 13) reported feeling not very or not at all comfortable assessing and managing anxiety and depression (30%, n = 13) and spiritual distress (34%, n = 15). Nearly one-quarter (22%, n = 10) had never discussed or documented advance care plans during fellowship. Fellows wished to receive future instruction on the assessment and management of physical symptoms (68%, n = 30) and anxiety and depression (64%, n = 28). Conclusion: Our survey highlights gaps in PC experience and education during transplant hepatology fellowship, lack of comfort in managing psychological distress and advance care planning, and desire to improve skills, particularly in symptom management. Future studies should investigate how to enhance transplant hepatology competencies in these PC domains and whether this impacts clinical care, advance care planning, or patient experience.

Hepatology communications · 13 citationsread the source →

A review of popular smartphone apps for depression and anxiety: Assessing the inclusion of evidence-based content.

Smartphone applications for the treatment of depression and anxiety have acquired millions of users, yet little is known about whether they include evidence-based therapeutic content. We examined the extent to which popular mental health applications (MH apps) for depression and anxiety contain treatment elements found in empirically supported psychotherapy protocols (i.e., "common elements"). Of the 27 MH apps reviewed, 23 included at least one common element, with a median of three elements. Psychoeducation (in 52% of apps), relaxation (44%), meditation (41%), mindfulness (37%), and assessment (37%) were the most frequent elements, whereas several elements (e.g., problem solving) were not found in any apps. We also identified gaps between app content and empirically supported treatments. Cognitive restructuring was more common in depression protocols than in depression apps (75% of protocols vs. 31% of apps), as was problem solving (34% vs. 0%). For anxiety, exposure (85%, 12%), cognitive restructuring (60%, 12%), and problem solving (25%, 0%) were more common in protocols than apps. Overall, our findings highlight empirically supported treatment elements that are poorly represented in current MH apps. The absence of several core treatment elements underscores the need for future research, including randomized trials testing the effectiveness of popular MH apps.

Behaviour research and therapy · 85 citationsread the source →

Global, regional, and national burden of stroke and its risk factors, 1990-2019: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2019.

Background: Regularly updated data on stroke and its pathological types, including data on their incidence, prevalence, mortality, disability, risk factors, and epidemiological trends, are important for evidence-based stroke care planning and resource allocation. The Global Burden of Diseases, Injuries, and Risk Factors Study (GBD) aims to provide a standardised and comprehensive measurement of these metrics at global, regional, and national levels. Methods: We applied GBD 2019 analytical tools to calculate stroke incidence, prevalence, mortality, disability-adjusted life-years (DALYs), and the population attributable fraction (PAF) of DALYs (with corresponding 95% uncertainty intervals [UIs]) associated with 19 risk factors, for 204 countries and territories from 1990 to 2019. These estimates were provided for ischaemic stroke, intracerebral haemorrhage, subarachnoid haemorrhage, and all strokes combined, and stratified by sex, age group, and World Bank country income level. Findings: In 2019, there were 12·2 million (95% UI 11·0-13·6) incident cases of stroke, 101 million (93·2-111) prevalent cases of stroke, 143 million (133-153) DALYs due to stroke, and 6·55 million (6·00-7·02) deaths from stroke. Globally, stroke remained the second-leading cause of death (11·6% [10·8-12·2] of total deaths) and the third-leading cause of death and disability combined (5·7% [5·1-6·2] of total DALYs) in 2019. From 1990 to 2019, the absolute number of incident strokes increased by 70·0% (67·0-73·0), prevalent strokes increased by 85·0% (83·0-88·0), deaths from stroke increased by 43·0% (31·0-55·0), and DALYs due to stroke increased by 32·0% (22·0-42·0). During the same period, age-standardised rates of stroke incidence decreased by 17·0% (15·0-18·0), mortality decreased by 36·0% (31·0-42·0), prevalence decreased by 6·0% (5·0-7·0), and DALYs decreased by 36·0% (31·0-42·0). However, among people younger than 70 years, prevalence rates increased by 22·0% (21·0-24·0) and incidence rates increased by 15·0% (12·0-18·0). In 2019, the age-standardised stroke-related mortality rate was 3·6 (3·5-3·8) times higher in the World Bank low-income group than in the World Bank high-income group, and the age-standardised stroke-related DALY rate was 3·7 (3·5-3·9) times higher in the low-income group than the high-income group. Ischaemic stroke constituted 62·4% of all incident strokes in 2019 (7·63 million [6·57-8·96]), while intracerebral haemorrhage constituted 27·9% (3·41 million [2·97-3·91]) and subarachnoid haemorrhage constituted 9·7% (1·18 million [1·01-1·39]). In 2019, the five leading risk factors for stroke were high systolic blood pressure (contributing to 79·6 million [67·7-90·8] DALYs or 55·5% [48·2-62·0] of total stroke DALYs), high body-mass index (34·9 million [22·3-48·6] DALYs or 24·3% [15·7-33·2]), high fasting plasma glucose (28·9 million [19·8-41·5] DALYs or 20·2% [13·8-29·1]), ambient particulate matter pollution (28·7 million [23·4-33·4] DALYs or 20·1% [16·6-23·0]), and smoking (25·3 million [22·6-28·2] DALYs or 17·6% [16·4-19·0]). Interpretation: The annual number of strokes and deaths due to stroke increased substantially from 1990 to 2019, despite substantial reductions in age-standardised rates, particularly among people older than 70 years. The highest age-standardised stroke-related mortality and DALY rates were in the World Bank low-income group. The fastest-growing risk factor for stroke between 1990 and 2019 was high body-mass index. Without urgent implementation of effective primary prevention strategies, the stroke burden will probably continue to grow across the world, particularly in low-income countries. Funding: Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation.

The Lancet. Neurology · 5441 citationsread the source →

Evidence regarding the utility of multiple mini-interview (MMI) for selection to undergraduate health programs: A BEME systematic review: BEME Guide No. 37.

Background: In the 11 years since its development at McMaster University Medical School, the multiple mini-interview (MMI) has become a popular selection tool. We aimed to systematically explore, analyze and synthesize the evidence regarding MMIs for selection to undergraduate health programs. Methods: The review protocol was peer-reviewed and prospectively registered with the Best Evidence Medical Education (BEME) collaboration. Thirteen databases were searched through 34 terms and their Boolean combinations. Seven key journals were hand-searched since 2004. The reference sections of all included studies were screened. Studies meeting the inclusion criteria were coded independently by two reviewers using a modified BEME coding sheet. Extracted data were synthesized through narrative synthesis. Results: A total of 4338 citations were identified and screened, resulting in 41 papers that met inclusion criteria. Thirty-two studies report data for selection to medicine, six for dentistry, three for veterinary medicine, one for pharmacy, one for nursing, one for rehabilitation, and one for health science. Five studies investigated selection to more than one profession. MMIs used for selection to undergraduate health programs appear to have reasonable feasibility, acceptability, validity, and reliability. Reliability is optimized by including 7-12 stations, each with one examiner. The evidence is stronger for face validity, with more research needed to explore content validity and predictive validity. In published studies, MMIs do not appear biased against applicants on the basis of age, gender, or socio-economic status. However, applicants of certain ethnic and social backgrounds did less well in a very small number of published studies. Performance on MMIs does not correlate strongly with other measures of noncognitive attributes, such as personality inventories and measures of emotional intelligence. Discussion: MMI does not automatically mean a more reliable selection process but it can do, if carefully designed. Effective MMIs require careful identification of the noncognitive attributes sought by the program and institution. Attention needs to be given to the number of stations, the blueprint and examiner training. Conclusion: More work is required on MMIs as they may disadvantage groups of certain ethnic or social backgrounds. There is a compelling argument for multi-institutional studies to investigate areas such as the relationship of MMI content to curriculum domains, graduate outcomes, and social missions; relationships of applicants' performance on different MMIs; bias in selecting applicants of minority groups; and the long-term outcomes appropriate for studies of predictive validity.

Medical teacher · 81 citationsread the source →

Psychosexual health in gynecological cancer

The literature surrounding psychosexual health and cancer patients has primarily considered the functional aspects of the disease and its treatment at the major expense of the emotional sequelae. Sexual health is defined by WHO as: "a state of physical, emotional, mental, and social well-being in relation to sexuality; it is not merely the absence of disease, dysfunction or infirmity. Sexual health requires a positive and respectful approach to sexuality and sexual relationships, as well as the possibility of having pleasurable and safe sexual experiences, free of coercion, discrimination and violence" [1]. A principle goal of WHO is to assist its member states in achieving the highest attainable standard of health care for all, including sexual and reproductive health [2]. Global statistics show that the world's female population is carrying an overwhelming burden of need in this area. Over 200 million women cannot access modern contraception, and millions of women suffer rape, domestic violence, and sexual abuse, not only in the context of wars and criminal activities, but also in their own homes [2]. Although the physical sequelae of these disasters can be treated, such as treatment for sexually transmitted infections, the emotional impact can frequently be hidden, ignored, or may not reveal its impact until many years after the event. Any illness or traumatic life event, past or present, can lead to sexual problems in the lifetime of a woman, and gynecological cancer is no exception. It is the root cause or trigger for sexual difficulties in at least 50% of women affected [3]. In 2012, the estimated number of women living with gynecological cancers was over three million, which means that potentially 1.5 million gynecological cancer survivors could be affected by an associated sexual difficulty [4]. Within the context of gynecological cancer, many of these problems can be alleviated if recognized and acknowledged early in the cancer journey, therefore contributing dramatic improvements to a woman's overall well-being. It is now estimated that half of the population of either sex will develop cancer at some time in their life. Globally, 40% − 45% of women will have a sexual problem at some stage, with the prevalence increasing with age [5]. Between 10% and 90% of women with any cancer will have sexual problems [6] and over 50% of women with gynecological cancer will have either temporary or persistent sexual difficulties [3]. As diagnosis and treatments improve, the number of women surviving cancer will increase, and survivorship issues including quality of life have become increasingly important. Sexuality is a key component of most subjective measurable quality of life indicators [7]. Sexual function and enjoyment are important components of survivorship and should not be ignored. The most common sexual problems can be divided into two groups: problems of function and/or problems of desire. There is, however, a complex interplay of organic disorders with emotional and psychosocial issues, and these divisions are merely artificial. Formal definitions of female sexual dysfunction have been adopted, including the US classifications in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders [8], although having a sexual difficulty does not constitute having a mental health disorder. Basson et al. [9] published a useful classification of the problems. Such classifications are useful for research purposes, but may often be less helpful when treating women. The predominant functional female sexual problem is pain on sexual intercourse, or dyspareunia. Deep dyspareunia describes intracoital pelvic pain, and superficial dyspareunia is pain on vaginal entry. Either could signify organic disease, and should be appropriately investigated. If no pathology is demonstrated, and the pain persists, then an emotional cause must be considered and pursued. Vaginismus, or involuntary spasm of the pubococcygeal and related musculature, can prevent sexual intercourse taking place. Good history taking can clarify whether there has been any penetration of the vagina, not only penile, but by fingers, sex toys, or tampons. If not, this is diagnostic of primary vaginismus, and apart from close inspection of the vulva and offer of gentle digital vaginal examination to determine the extent of the vaginismus, no further clinical investigation is warranted. Women with gynecological cancer are more likely to have secondary vaginismus caused by pain experienced from the disease or its treatment, and fear of the pain occurring during sex [10]. Loss of libido or loss of sexual interest on the other hand is a problem of desire. There are no physiological markers for loss of desire when its origins are psychogenic, with psychosocial contributions, past and present relationships, traumas, and emotional factors all inhibiting the woman's wish to be sexual. One of the key ways to determine the origins of the sexual difficulty is to ask about the sexual and emotional relationship between the woman and her partner before the cancer diagnosis. It should not be assumed that problems are all due to the cancer, as long-standing relationship problems may be disclosed, and need to be incorporated into any counselling. The exception to this is the woman who suddenly becomes menopausal following cancer treatment, who had no problems with sex or desire prior to her cancer therapy. Appropriate standard therapy for her menopausal symptoms should be considered; however, the impact of a cancer diagnosis will be life changing, and drug treatment of hormonal deprivation symptoms may not be sufficient without some psychological or counselling support, or may be contraindicated as in the case of breast and endometrial cancer [11]. A diagnosis of gynecological cancer is overwhelming. While the instinctive professional response from clinicians is to ensure long-term survival, sexual issues are important for quality of life and should be considered in the decision-making process [12]. Sexual dysfunction is one of the most common and distressing consequences of cancer treatment [13]. Many treatments are shown to have sexual impacts, both positive and negative, and should be discussed fully with the woman pre-treatment so that she can make an autonomous decision about her care. Early offer of discussion of sexual issues in the cancer journey can lead to better sexual outcomes. Cervical cancer is the most common gynecological cancer worldwide. Cervical cancer survivors are at risk of sexual pain disorders, no matter which modality of treatment is used. A small study of patients who underwent radical vaginal trachelectomy for early stage cervical cancer showed sexual dysfunction, including loss of libido, for up to one year following treatment; however, by 12 months, sexual activity had reached that of healthy women [14]. Following radical hysterectomy for locally advanced cervical cancer, there was no significant difference in sexual activity and enjoyment between women with benign or malignant disease; however, the cancer group had worse problems than healthy controls with body image and vaginal functioning [15]. In women with advanced cervical cancer given chemoradiotherapy, pain during intercourse was in fact reduced after treatment [16]. This may have been a result of the resolution of bleeding, discharge, and pelvic pain. However, the anxiety surrounding cancer remains for many women. Women surviving up to 15 years following cervical cancer treatment showed poorer quality of life than healthy controls, and those who had received radiotherapy were significantly more affected by sexual dysfunction than those who had surgery alone [17]. Despite this however, orgasm may be unimpaired following radiation [18]. Many additional needs were expressed by women with cervical cancer; however, sexuality and intimacy came to the fore as a predominant issue for survivorship [19]. It has been known for some time that the physical and emotional impact of ovarian cancer can be devastating, leading to sexual as well as global quality of life issues [20]. One study has shown a prevalence of 63% for sexual difficulties among women with a diagnosis of ovarian cancer [3]. The effects of chemotherapy and surgery, combined with the anxiety about survival can have a dramatic negative effect on the woman's libido, and even women who undertake risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy can suffer sexual dysfunction [21]. Many of these women are totally unprepared for the devastating effects of sudden menopause, with hot flushes, vaginal dryness, and loss of libido replacing a previously healthy sex life. This could be helped by more realistic counselling before the procedure, and increased postoperative emotional support. One study has shown that women who had surgery for endometrial cancer had no differences in their own sexual experience postoperatively, but compared with healthy controls, they had more sexual difficulties overall [22]. Women with Lynch syndrome who opt for preventive surgery tend to be happy overall with the surgery, but are often unprepared for the physical adverse effects of menopause [23]. In contrast, Moldovan et al. [24] has reported that, despite sometimes debilitating menopausal symptoms, there were no significant sexual difficulties associated with the procedure. Vulvectomy is a common treatment for vulvar malignancy. This is increasingly affecting younger women, who are HIV positive. Women with vulvar cancer can have many years of difficulties with sex due to often distressing vulvar symptoms and bleeding. Following treatment they still suffer severe dyspareunia and body image distortion due to the effects of treatment. Although a recent study showed no differences in psychosocial and sexual functioning before and after vulvectomy, it was acknowledged that women with vulvar malignancy have a high risk for sexual problems compared with healthy controls [25]. Factors associated with postoperative sexual difficulties are increased age, poor overall physical and mental health well-being, and extent of the surgical excision [25]. This often elderly group of patients is usually neglected from the psychosexual point of view. The majority of the literature related to sexuality and cancer stems from high-resource countries. Although most of these studies encompass all women, there is a lack of good published evidence on the treatment of the sexual sequelae of cancer in relation to ethnic minority groups, within a majority culture [26]. Furthermore, data from low- and middle-income countries are scant. Much of the literature focuses on sexual distress and activity in relation to HIV and AIDS which, of course, is a global priority; however, this focus on infection transmission should not take away from the emotional needs of the woman who suffers from gynecological cancer. Sexuality research around the globe must be perceived and researched in terms of cultural, spiritual, ethnic, and religious contexts. Sexual problems in women with gynecological cancer may be associated with adverse effects of surgical, hormonal, and chemical treatments, as well as by the cancer itself. Fortunately, emotional, sexual, and quality of life outcomes improve as less morbid, more minimally invasive surgical treatments for gynecological cancers develop [12]. Chemotherapy-induced ovarian failure in cancer patients is associated with all the possible symptoms of a sudden menopause, combined with the emotional impact not only of the cancer, but loss of physical well-being and fertility all at the same time. Vaginal dryness can be a major problem to those women who wish to have sex [27], and appropriate vaginal moisturizers and lubricants can help. The issue of vaginal estrogen is still debated, but should be discussed with the patient, weighing up the risk − benefit ratio for each individual. Vaginal estrogen will, in most cases, alleviate the dryness, but there may be concerns about using hormones, especially in relation to breast cancer where the evidence is unclear. The scientific data, however, support the safety of low dose vaginal estrogen therapy [28]. It is not well understood that following a few weeks of vaginal estrogen, the vagina thickens and cornifies and estrogen is not absorbed as a result. Newer treatments such as selective estrogen receptor modulators have been used in place of vaginal estrogen in women without cancer [29], and may prove good alternatives in the future [30]. There are non-hormonal vaginal moisturizers and lubricants to make sexual intercourse more comfortable. Unfortunately, some commercial sexual lubricants can be hyperosmolar and could cause epithelial disruption, facilitating HIV transmission [31]. Simple lubricants such as olive oil or liquid glycerin have been used successfully in interventions to alleviate pain on intercourse due to vaginal dryness, combining their use with physiotherapy and psychosexual counselling. Treatments with pelvic external beam radiotherapy and/or with brachytherapy may cause vaginal shortening, tightening, and lack of pliability. The use of vaginal dilators to overcome these complications is widespread, despite lack of conclusive evidence, either for or against, either with or without a coating of estrogen cream [32]. Unsurprisingly, the intrusion of inserting a plastic (or sometimes glass) tube into a tender vagina after treatment is a task that may carry a deep psychological and emotional impact [33], and will have resultant poor compliance. Radiation oncologists agree that information about dilator use should be given before treatment [34], and that sufficient patient information and support are essential to improve compliance. Sensitivity to emotions and women's views and personal values in relation to sexuality are essential supports to encouraging dilator use [35]. Any of the above problems cannot fail to have an emotional impact on the woman and on her partner. Many sexual difficulties are automatically blamed on the organic disruption caused by cancer and its treatments; however, once any clearly indicated treatments have been given, in a sizable proportion of cases, the sexual difficulty will remain unresolved. Many sexual difficulties are psychogenic, and no amount of skilled clinical treatments will help if not linked closely to appropriate counselling, psychological, or psychosexual therapy. This form of intervention will enable the woman to expose and reflect on her sexual difficulties, in the context of her life and relationship not only since the cancer, but beforehand. This is often a time when past problems, such as childhood abuse, or problems with her current partner will surface. Some partners are disgusted by the physical impacts of cancer, and the relationship will suffer. On the other hand, some partners become more supportive and the cancer leads to stronger relationships [36]. Classic psychosexual therapy, using brief, focused psychotherapeutic techniques is the mainstay of treatment. It can be used with an individual or a couple, of any sexual orientation or cultural or religious background. This is a way of listening reflectively to the patient, so that they can gain their own insights into their sexual problem. The issue of genital examination is considered if relevant, as it enables the woman to connect with her genital area, and may trigger deep-seated thoughts or anxieties that the woman had blocked emotionally. This, of course, is a technique used only by clinicians who are qualified to examine the patient [37]. Clinical psychologists and counsellors trained in psychosexual work also treat women with sexual problems. Globally, because the availability of trained personnel differs, many simple innovative treatment interventions have been tried. A brief intervention using a well-accepted treatment, cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), combined with sexual health education had positive results on patients who had risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy [21]. Psychosexual interventions work [38], and like all psychodynamic interventions only require a trained counsellor and a means of allowing access to the patient. The internet has enabled access to health care for many people around the world who are not able to travel long and difficult land journeys to direct provision of health care. An online intervention with a professional moderator has proven acceptable to gynecological cancer patients with a sexual difficulty [39], and another internet-based sexual difficulties intervention with counselling sessions proved more successful in improving sexuality issues than without a counsellor; however, there was no difference between the two groups in relation to emotional distress and quality of life [40]. Elsewhere, telephone interventions are being used, also with some success; however, it is clear that the knowledge, skills, and training of the health professional providing the intervention are relevant to the patient outcome. Multidisciplinary care should form the backbone of treatment of sexual difficulties in women with gynecological cancer, incorporating physical, psychoeducational, and psychosexual input. Team discussions, including clinicians, psychosexual therapists, and physiotherapists are well within the capabilities of many cancer centers, remembering that the patient and her partner are the focal point and should always be consulted. It is impossible to diagnose and treat a sexual problem if one does not acknowledge that it exists. Many studies in the past have identified lack of willingness of doctors and nurses to discuss sex, but sadly recent research has shown that not much has changed. For instance, in a cohort sample of 1154 US obstetrician − gynecologists, 60% did not ask patients about sexual problems [41]. Too often clinicians make value judgements about their patients including whether sexuality is an important part of their lives. Such assumptions may include biases about age, appearance, sexual preferences, and marital status of people who have sex. People with cancer and their partners have unmet sexual information and support needs [42], often due to the unwillingness of healthcare professionals to discuss sexual issues, even though they recognize it may be important to the patient. There are many barriers to talking about sex, affecting both the patient and the clinician, such as cultural background, and age and gender discrepancies between doctor and patient. There may be simple barriers, such as lack of privacy in a consultation, as often cancer patients are accompanied by family or close friends. Patients often state that they feel it is trivial to take up the doctor's time with non-life-threatening issues such as sex. Clinicians often cite lack of training as a reason that they are uncomfortable talking about sex and poor provision of this training has been noted [13]. Different models of communication skills training have been used and those undertaking the training have shown greater empathy and were more inclined to use open questions [43]. This technique of speaking to the patient in an open rather than interrogative manner can easily facilitate discussion of intimate issues. An even greater challenge in communication is the recognition that individuals are sexual beings up to the end of life. To some women in the palliative phase, sexual touch and closeness to their partner is of vital importance. Sadly this is rarely recognized and addressed by palliative care physicians [44]. It is important to remember that a minority of the female population identifies as lesbian, and that about 8% of the population is bisexual. While this should make no difference to the quality of sexual health care they receive, lesbians and bisexuals find it difficult to disclose their sexuality to clinicians, often inhibited by their cultural or religious background, and fears of facing discrimination [45]. If the clinician asks the patient at the outset if they have a sexual partner, and whether the partner is male or female, it will greatly enhance the quality of the doctor − patient interaction. Lesbian partners in particular can be very supportive during the cancer journey, and should be given the opportunity to be present if the patient wishes. Despite the recognized need for treatment of sexual problems in menopause and gynecological cancer, there is poor provision of specialist training to ensure that this important area of service provision is met [46]. Undergraduate teaching is important, but it is only by recognizing psychosexual medicine in formal gynecology or oncology training, as a compulsory requirement of the course, that this situation will begin to be addressed. Innovative online programs [47] can make a major impact on global training opportunities and give trainees around the world an opportunity to gain some skills and insight into treating sexual difficulties in a nonjudgmental way. Owing to the global prevalence of sexual problems associated with gynecological cancer, it should be within every gynecologist's or oncologist's duty of care to the patient to be aware of and have some understanding of how to diagnose and facilitate treatment for sexual problems in a nonjudgmental manner. This is true holistic medicine, recognizing not only the cancer, but the woman behind the symptoms, and requires awareness of the emotional, social, and relationship aspects of the patient's life. The ability of any person to enjoy a sexual life free of coercion, shame, disease, or pain in a consensual manner is a fundamental element of the human rights of women, and should be an unequivocally accepted as part of her gynecological cancer care. To make a difference, even in the absence of expensive and sophisticated cancer treatments, just acknowledging, listening, and offering support to the woman with sexual difficulties related to cancer will ultimately have a major benefit to her quality of life. The author has no conflict of interest. Please note: The publisher is not responsible for the content or functionality of any supporting information supplied by the authors. Any queries (other than missing content) should be directed to the corresponding author for the article.

International Journal of Gynecology & Obstetrics · 17 citationsread the source →

Programmatic approaches to achieving equity for women in anesthesiology

Key points Women anesthesiologists can experience barriers and bias in the workplace, which varies in nature across their career and can negatively hinder professional development. Mitigation of these barriers and discrimination can be achieved through: (1) addressing individual bias, (2) closing the knowledge gap on the scope of bias, (3) deliberate representation, (4) strengthening professional networks, and (5) organized efforts to create policies that address gender inequity in the workplace. Women in anesthesiology is one example of several organized initiatives and programs that promote gender equity for women anesthesiologists of all identities. Introduction Women have long fought for equity in medicine and to be treated respectfully and professionally as physicians. One hundred seventy-five years ago, Elizabeth Blackwell was admitted to medical school as a joke, and since then, the viewpoint that medicine is emotionally undesirable, intellectually taxing, and physically draining for women has persisted. Pioneering women anesthesiologists, including Isabella Herb and Virginia Apgar, were discouraged from training as surgeons and pushed into the lower paying and “lower status” specialty of anesthesiology. Despite 50 years since the passage of Title IV, a Federal civil rights law that prohibits discrimination on the basis of sex in any educational program or activity that receives federal funding, and the fact that half of the medical students are women, there is still major attrition of women as they advance in anesthesiology residencies, careers, and leadership.1,2 Recent studies have attempted to examine the reasons for this inequity and bring awareness of the widespread discrimination and systemic bias affecting women anesthesiologists and their departure from medicine.1,3–8 Identifying as a woman in anesthesiology is multifaceted and nuanced. Women can be at different points in their professional careers and personal lives. This may be associated with a broad spectrum of identities, including but not limited to clinicians, academicians, activists, or advocates, as well as mothers, children, siblings, or partners. These identities also intersect with sexuality, race, ethnicity, culture, spirituality, and community. This diversity of lived experiences is why blanket assumptions about women anesthesiologists should be avoided. However, despite these varied identities, all women anesthesiologists are subject to institutional and cultural norms regarding gender. Therefore, the development of multiple initiatives and programs to promote gender equity for women anesthesiologists of all identities is paramount. In this article, we will review the scope of the gender problem in our specialty, discuss proposed strategies to enhance equity, and examine 1 organization’s approach to advocating for gender equity in anesthesiology. Scope of the problem Overworked, undervalued, harassed, and silenced. These are the sentiments of many women in anesthesiology. Many of the challenges encountered are synergized by a climate and culture that enable and fail to adequately address these issues.9 Gender disparities within anesthesiology exist because of systemic barriers and biases, limited number of women in anesthesiology leadership, and limited mentorship.5 The proportion of women physicians in anesthesiology ranks in the lower third among all medical specialties.10 Despite significant advances in the number of women entering medicine over the last few decades, anesthesiology programs have yet to achieve gender parity.7 Among anesthesiology residents, 33% are women. Women represent 25% of the overall anesthesiology workforce and 37% of the academic anesthesiology workforce, and these numbers remain relatively static.1,6,8 Meanwhile, other surgical and procedural subspecialties have doubled and tripled the percentage of women in their field and surpassed anesthesiology. Women anesthesiologists also are underrepresented in various positions of leadership or influence, and as authors and editors.4 They are paid significantly less than their male counterparts for equitable work, with an annual pay gap of 8%, or $32,000 a year, and are overall more likely to be in a lower salary range.5 Over a 30-year career span, this translates to roughly $1,000,000 in lost earnings.5 Even after adjusting for age, work experience, hours worked, academic productivity, and rank, the gap in gender pay remained and in fact, widened over the course of an anesthesiologist’s career.5 There are several systemic issues that hinder the recruitment, retention, and success of women in anesthesiology. Women physicians, relative to men, encounter additional hurdles to performing their jobs, especially at the early stages of their careers.11 Women physicians are more frequently asked about their age and experience compared with their men counterparts. A study found when treatment advice was given by an inexperienced physician, and participants reported relying significantly more on the advice of a man versus a woman.11 This suggests that some of the hurdles that women physicians face are rooted in the psychological biases of others rather than objective features of cases or treatment settings.11 The results of the few studies examining the effects of gender on daily practice in the specialty of anesthesiology are discouraging. A recent survey study assessing gender disparities perceived by women anesthesiologists found that majority (90%) of the respondents felt that women in medicine need to work harder than men to achieve the same career goals, and sexual harassment was experienced by 55%.12 Similarly, in a survey of women cardiothoracic anesthesiologists, 24% of respondents reported experiencing unwanted physical or sexual advances, and 45% reported experiencing verbal harassment.13 The majority of respondents also reported experiencing intimidation or derogatory language in the workplace.13 As well stated by the authors: “lack of psychological safety and respect in working environments increases the risk of communication failures, and intimidation in the setting of managing surgical patients increases stress and risk for burnout”.13 The original “pipeline theory” proposed that sex-based discrimination in academic medicine would diminish once women achieved a critical mass of > 30% of the academic workforce.14 Interestingly, “women who examine trends in sex disparities in the workplace are often ridiculed, labeled as whining, or determined to be less capable in their ability to lead.”15 Paired with that, women physicians are less likely to be addressed as “doctor,” they are more likely to be interrupted (at times in the middle of their preoperative assessment), and more likely to be labeled as “bossy” when asserting information.16 The culture of medicine is unlikely to change without improving formal reporting mechanisms of sex-based discrimination and sexual harassment.14 Unfortunately, the prevalence of sexist microaggressions against women anesthesiologists is still high, and this ongoing workplace mistreatment can cause chronic and severe distress.17 Sex equity is an issue of urgency in the practice of anesthesiology. Those in leadership positions have the additional responsibility of leveraging their power to influence the broader institutional culture.15 Having women at the top of organizations has been shown to improve organizational performance.18 Women represent approximately half of students entering medical school and ~41% of full-time academic faculty,19 yet women constitute a minority of leaders.20 Sex disparities continue to exist at the upper levels of leadership in academic anesthesiology.1 Only 18% of women are professors, and the percentage of women anesthesiology department chairs remains unchanged from 2006 to 2016 (12.7% vs. 14%).21 As of this writing, neither Anesthesia & Analgesia nor Anesthesiology has had a woman Editor-in-Chief. On that note, men and women have significant differences in measures of publication productivity, a recent study demonstrating that male anesthesiologists had a higher h-index, number of publications, and number of citations.22 Women have also been underrepresented in national meetings with fewer speaker opportunities.8 Overall, the extremely limited proportion of women professors and chairs in anesthesiology, presidents of professional societies, and senior editors of specialty journals speak for itself when it comes to a lack of visibility at the highest level of the specialty.9 Despite the many barriers that women experience, they are just as eager as men to assume leadership positions.23 The “glass ceiling” still exists within the culture of anesthesiology, benefiting the “masculine” attitudes in the competition for academic positions.24 We need to change this outdated culture and climate in anesthesiology and create and help elevate more women into a pathway of equity. Anesthesiologists and pregnancy Pregnancy and motherhood have a tremendous impact on sex discrimination in anesthesiology. A woman’s peak fertility often coincides with residency training and early career, a time when one’s career trajectory becomes established. This is also the time when the sex gap in academic promotion and productivity widens. Having children at that time is a challenge, and it is known that work demands adversely affect women anesthesiologists’ desired number of children and the desired age of childbearing. Anesthesiologists have the highest rate of maternal discrimination among all medical specialties.25 Sixty percent of anesthesiology residents reported a negative stigma around being pregnant and having children during training, and about half of trainees reported feeling discouraged from becoming pregnant or breastfeeding during training.7,26,27 Difficulties faced by women who are pregnant during training include inadequate maternity leave, insufficient access to lactation facilities at work, and negative culture surrounding pregnancy during training.26 Because of obstacles pertaining to motherhood, 1 in 10 female anesthesiologists would counsel a student against a career in anesthesiology.7 However, 86.2% of women anesthesiologists indicated that if given a choice again, they would still have their child during training despite these obstacles.26 Given the negative stigma associated with pregnancy in residency training, many women delay pregnancy until their early career, which typically occurs in the early 30s, leading to a higher likelihood of infertility.28 Approximately one-fourth of American female physicians are diagnosed with infertility at almost 34 years old, with a third of those due to diminished ovarian reserve, and this rate is significantly higher than the general population and other professionals that pursued higher education and careers.28,29 Contributing factors to the high rate of infertility among women in medicine may include stressors intrinsic to training, long hours, and night shifts.29 Infertility can lead to substantial depression, anxiety, burnout, and family planning regrets.28,29 Compounding the physical and emotional challenges of infertility is the exorbitant financial burden of treatment.29 In the United States, in vitro fertilization (IVF) costs ~$15,000 per round of treatment, not including the cost of medication.29 Unfortunately, fertility coverage for the majority of health professionals is lacking, and many medical institutions provide limited fertility coverage that will cover ~1 to 2 IVF cycles.29 In comparison, companies in the business, technology, and social media sector are recognizing the growing need for fertility coverage and are offering more comprehensive fertility, adoption, and surrogacy coverage, which has promoted physical and emotional well-being, job satisfaction, and enhanced employee recruitment and retention.29,30 In addition to cost, time is an additional barrier for seeking fertility treatment for anesthesiologists, and schedule modifications are often necessary. IVF typically requires the patient to present for multiple in-person monitoring appointments over a 2-week period during ovarian stimulation. On the basis of the outcome of the monitoring, an egg retrieval may be scheduled imminently, with little room for flexibility in timing. Without accommodation, women may need to take a vacation, paid or unpaid time off to undergo treatment, worsening the financial strain of infertility. Women anesthesiologists are also more likely to have pregnancy complications and miscarriages than the general population.31 Data suggests that women who work in the operating room have a higher incidence of first-trimester spontaneous abortions or a higher risk of birth defects.31 Women anesthesiologists report a higher rate of pregnancy complications [premature labor (8.8%), bedrest (7.8%), preeclampsia (6.5%), and a Neonatal Intensive Care Unit (NICU) stay for the baby (5.7%)], negative stigma for taking time off for pregnancy complications, and guilt in burdening colleagues with increased shifts and calls.26 Many attending anesthesiologists do not receive a modified work schedule during pregnancy.27 In some practice models, time off for pregnancy complications may not be paid and may decrease time for parental leave. Parental leave is an essential component to achieving postpartum physical and mental health and is crucial for infant bonding. trainees in parental leave was reported as and a of training programs not have a formal maternity leave trainees a of and for Approximately of anesthesiology residents felt their maternity leave was felt discouraged from taking more time and felt of with on However, of trainees also their programs as in of maternity leave In the American of Anesthesiologists a on which paid parental leave for after birth or of a In the American of Anesthesiology from the which residents to for an additional of leave without In the American of and a parental leave which for all to of parental leave, of for parental leave, without who as attending anesthesiologists report an parental leave time of and a of on the practice maternity leave may be of a of and leave This is in to other as and that have significant in paid parental leave, with companies offering to of paid other women anesthesiologists work postpartum to the to work and face the of lactation in the breastfeeding at a higher rate than the general they have a lower rate by infant age of the report the desired breastfeeding and having lactation In time and lack of can it to there are that are becoming more they may not work for all women. the has a on Among Anesthesia in to lactation in the of with the demands of work, women anesthesiologists face the burden of of of or motherhood, women physicians an of more hours per on are more likely to be the for children or the and are less likely to have a In addition to the women the and mental in labor about the of and labor on the emotional about in and managing is the of and emotional labor and is to as the in the of the The these to the by the to the culture of medicine and in the United In the stages of the some anesthesiologists were on unpaid leave of others work hours because of increased at A survey from the of Anesthesiologists at the time that women anesthesiologists were or given more often than those women who continue working on the they an and as there was about the of the They were to the and the to their from the and the of their children as As a more women anesthesiologists, work hours, to work, and medicine In with school and a on many women their time to on and an of more hours per than on and in a 33% in hours and academic productivity as compared with The percentage of with women as authors during the early stages of the despite the of in the sex gap in academic crucial for academic were also for women physicians as and there was time for because of personal or institutional the provide the flexibility to from the prevalence of and also Overall, the an increased burden on women anesthesiologists to the family and with and the sex gap in academic productivity and strategies to enhance gender equity in anesthesiology strategies to achieve gender equity in our we to gender equity in and policies and in and medical The in all that the to achieving sex equity in our is and is more than women with and leadership However, we that systemic change can be achieved by which were present in all the we (1) addressing individual bias, (2) closing the knowledge gap on the scope of bias, (3) deliberate representation, (4) strengthening professional networks, and (5) organized efforts to create policies that address gender inequity in the workplace. individual bias to create a culture of in a or and training in equity, and is to address individual equity, and training and education can cover a of systemic to as bias, and and can be in a of from individual to There are organizations that provide training, and as and are efforts lead to the of policies and leadership that women in the workplace, should gender equity to be a of the and should in the of sex equity into organizational and the knowledge gap on the scope of bias should be and reported to the of women anesthesiologists, barriers to their and systemic Data include performing of and professional need to be about professional is and among and should be and to and should be There to be deliberate and of women in recruitment, retention, promotion and in including women and their in any or policies are that affect work culture is should be or than that if more than 1 woman is there is a higher likelihood that a woman will achieve a has been in diversity by the of and which to the of women. additional strategies to enhance should by the job of an and should equity rather than flexibility and choice is leave policies with job and for workplace of for and other and policies should be to enhance the of women anesthesiologists at all There should be for and sex-based professional has been on the of women, but there are other that are as including and and help to women and their are and They can and promote women, their and their experience, the woman’s is for the of and media has increased the visibility of women anesthesiologists and has without the to in-person and However, deliberate formal or are also known development and leadership training for women that on and visibility can with efforts to create policies that address sex inequity in the workplace is to that there are challenges to a sex and the gender that are in workplace Women are known as and the of of a is for lactation and by the workplace that is and enhance is to the workplace a more for women to women are not on the promotion and should be In organized efforts to provide professional leadership training, and for women anesthesiologists at the and national levels are This not to enhance the of women but also to help women and address the systemic issues they encounter in a of an example organizations have been that are to improving equity for women These include national organizations in and of the anesthesiology organizations of Anesthesiologists on Women of Women in American of Anesthesia and Women in Anesthesia and and for Care Women in Care and leadership development and for Anesthesiology and Women of in Anesthesiology Women of Anesthesiology A of programs that there is and to provide professional development to discuss the organizational approach to gender equity in anesthesiology, we will on 1 Women in Anesthesiology is a in by to the professional and personal development of women also the recruitment, retention, and job of women in anesthesiology and a culture of and faced challenges residency and early career as a without the of a from the for and after other women of Women Women in the was to provide a addressing systemic were on addressing (1) lack of professional respect in with male (2) personal and professional and (3) of and to promote women to leadership efforts the of social media to women across and to provide education and to the affecting women efforts were by women in early and who were experiencing the of work for in leadership across societies, and institutions was pursued regarding enhanced and of women for and education regarding the of having women in leadership As a not associated with a efforts are in systemic change in other anesthesiology work, social media and in the of for and at efforts by of the of have national leave of and lactation in the and the on and the on were by who in The nature of also for on social and health issues to anesthesiologists, including and on these issues by and for to more in efforts that are to In addition to professional development for women and men an and a women anesthesiologists as national and to as the a and the operating have on to or In a social and on the provide on to women The of are these and annual including the and and on levels are by and a in-person the However, as a of full-time working women physicians, their careers and personal 1 of the has been the and to a and for our there have been many associated with the and development of 1 of the is the recent of a is well known that anesthesiology has remained other in the recruitment of women to the it would anesthesiologists that women medical students are more likely to a surgical than anesthesiology as a The a recent from the on to a program at students to about anesthesiology, address the challenges that women anesthesiologists and provide a national for from in medical the student are women of and their for and will help to improve the diversity of our has on the initiatives include a for all practice a professional and an in-person medical education In will continue to in medical students and physicians by programs and a The has for women in but that there is still work to be is in the of the to be of all and to improve for identities. In of our work has in for change in but culture change is by at the and institutional The by and other organizations at sex equity a of to into and to a systemic approach to of Despite numbers there is still major attrition of women in anesthesiology as they advance in their Sex disparities within anesthesiology exist because of systemic barriers and biases, with in cultural norms to which results in many women anesthesiologists feeling and discrimination from their women anesthesiologists with and leadership training is inadequate to address this and studies the need for systemic change to address inequity as enhanced representation, and as Women in Anesthesiology and other to equity for women anesthesiologists of all identities are paramount. of The authors that they have to

International Anesthesiology Clinics · 8 citationsread the source →

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF DEPRESSION: DO WE HAVE ANY SOLID EVIDENCE OF INTEREST TO CLINICIANS?

Major depressive disorder (MDD) is a common and costly disorder which is usually associated with severe and persistent symptoms leading to important social role impairment and increased mortality 1,2. It is one of the most important causes of disability worldwide 3. The high rate of inadequate treatment of the disorder remains a serious concern 1. This review is aimed at summarizing the solid evidence on the etiology and pathophysiology of MDD that is likely relevant for clinical psychiatry. Neurobiological findings are regarded as solid when they are consistent and convergent, i.e., they have been confirmed by several studies using the same method and fit into results from studies using different methodological approaches. Family, twin, and adoption studies provide very solid and consistent evidence that MDD is a familial disorder and that this familiality is mostly or entirely due to genetic factors 4. This important finding suggests that parental social behavior and other familial environmental risk factors are not as important in the pathogenesis of MDD as previously assumed and should not be the major focus of the treatment of the disorder. The above-mentioned studies consistently show that the influence of genetic factors is around 30–40% 4. Non-genetic factors, explaining the remaining 60–70% of the variance in susceptibility to MDD, are individual-specific environmental effects (including measurement error effects and gene-environment interactions). These effects are mostly adverse events in childhood and ongoing or recent stress due to interpersonal adversities, including childhood sexual abuse, other lifetime trauma, low social support, marital problems, and divorce 5,6. These results suggest that there is a huge potential in the prevention of MDD by means of psychosocial interventions (e.g., in schools, at workplace). In addition, these results mirror the clinical practice of empirically validated psychotherapies to treat depression 7,8,9, including interpersonal, psychodynamic and cognitive behavioral psychotherapies and cognitive behavioural analysis system of psychotherapy, which all focus directly or indirectly on interpersonal difficulties and skills. This does not exclude the fact that unidentified non-genetic, non-psychosocial risk factors may also play important roles in some patients (e.g., climatic change, medical conditions). Stress sensitivity in depression is partly gender-specific. While men and women are, in general, equally sensitive to the depressogenic effects of stressful life events, their responses vary depending upon the type of stressor. Specifically, men are more likely to have depressive episodes following divorce, separation, and work difficulties, whereas women are more sensitive to events in their proximal social network, such as difficulty getting along with an individual, serious illness, or death 10. These findings point to the importance of gender-sensitive psychosocial approaches in the prevention and treatment of MDD. In contrast to the very solid evidence from epidemiological studies on broad risk factor domains, there is no solid evidence for specific genes and specific gene-by-environment interactions in the pathogenesis of MDD. Genome-wide association studies have indicated that many genes with small effects are involved in complex diseases, increasing the difficulty in identifying such genes 11. While there has been progress in the search for risk genes for several complex diseases despite this methodological problem 12, psychiatric conditions have turned out to be very resistant to robust gene identification. For example, based on a community-based prospective study, it has been proposed that a specific genetic variation in the promoter region of the serotonin transporter (a target of antidepressant drugs) interacts with stressful life events in the pathogenesis of depression 13. Although there is high clinical and neurobiological plausibility of this interaction, a recent meta-analysis yielded no evidence that the serotonin transporter gene alone or in interaction with psychological stress was associated with the risk of depression 14. The limited success of genetic studies of depression has been related to use of current classification schemas including ICD-10 and DSM-IV. These diagnostic manuals are based on clusters of symptoms and characteristics of clinical course that do not necessarily describe homogenous disorders but instead reflect common final pathways of different pathophysiolgical processes 15,16. The clinician should be aware that family history will continue to be the most solid source of information to estimate the genetic risk of MDD. Corticotropin-releasing hormone (CRH) is released from the hypothalamus in response to the perception of psychological stress by cortical brain regions. This hormone induces the secretion of pituitary corticotropin, which stimulates the adrenal gland to release cortisol into the plasma. The physiologic response to stress is partly gender-specific: women show generally greater stress responsiveness than men, which is consistent with the greater incidence of major depression in women 17. Moreover, men show greater cortisol responses to achievement challenges, whereas women show greater cortisol responses to social rejection challenges 18. Although MDD is considered as a stress disorder, most subjects treated for MDD have no evidence of dysfunctions of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis (HPA) 19. However, some subjects with MDD do show abnormalities of that axis and of the extrahypothalamic CRH system 20. Altered stress hormone secretion appeared to be most prominent in depressed subjects with a history of childhood trauma 21. Elevated cortisol may act as a mediator between major depression and its physical long-term consequences such as coronary heart disease, type II diabetes, and osteoporosis 22. The importance of HPA axis dysfunction for the efficacy of antidepressants is a matter of debate 23. This axis is regulated through a dual system of mineralocorticoid (MR) and glucocorticoid (GR) receptors. Decreased limbic GR receptor function 24,25 and increased functional activity of the MR system 26 suggest an imbalance in the MR/GR ratio in stress-related conditions such as MDD. Epigenetic regulation of the glucocorticoid receptors has been associated with childhood abuse 27. Such environmental programming of gene expression may represent one possible mechanism that links early life stress to abnormal HPA axis function and increased risk of MDD in adults. While the CRH stimulation test (dex/CRH test) 28 is a sensitive measure of the HPA axis dysfunction in depression, the specificity of this test for MDD is low. However, non-suppression in the dex/CRH test has consistently predicted increased risk for depressive relapse during clinical remission 23. Additionally, the measurement of waking salivary cortisol concentration has been shown to be a simple and sensitive test for HPA axis hyperactivity in depression 29. Hypercortisolemia is almost exclusively found in subjects with severe and psychotic depression, in whom glucocorticoid antagonists may have some therapeutic effect 30. There is convergent evidence for CRH to play a major role in the pathogenesis of certain types of depression. Levels of CRH in the cerebrospinal fluid are elevated in some depressed subjects 31. Post-mortem studies reported an increased number of CRH secreting neurons in limbic brain regions in depression 32, likely reflecting a compensatory response to increased CRH concentrations 33. In addition, CRH produces a number of physiological and behavioral alterations that resemble the symptoms of major depression, including decreased appetite, disrupted sleep, decreased libido, and psychomotor alterations 34. There is also preliminary evidence that CRH1 receptor antagonists reduce symptoms of depression and anxiety 35. “Sickness behavior” as a result of an activation of the inflammatory response system shares many symptoms with depression, including fatigue, anhedonia, psychomotor retardation, and cognitive impairment. Sickness is mediated by pro-inflammatory cytokines such as interleukin-1α, tumor necrosis factor-α, and interleukin-6, which activate the HPA axis and impair the central serotonin system 36. The prevalence of depression as an unwanted effect of recombinant interferons is around 30% 37. In animals, blocking pro-inflammatory cytokine-mediated signaling produces antidepressant-like effects 38. Clinical data suggest that cytokines may play a role in the pathophysiology of a subgroup of depressed subjects, particularly those with comorbid physical conditions 36. The antidepressant enhancing effect of acetylsalicylic acid 39 points to the possible clinical relevance of psychoneuroimmunology in clinical depression research. Taken together, the laboratory tests with the highest potential to be clinically useful in the care of depressed individuals are based on abnormalities of the neuroendocrine and neuroimmune systems. Despite the large amount of basic science data suggesting that the HPA axis is importantly involved in the pathophysiology of depression, the effect of pharmacological modulation of this neuroendocrine system as antidepressant therapy has been disappointing. The link between childhood trauma and a permanently altered physiologic stress system points to the use of specific psychotherapies in the treatment of depressed patients with a history of early life trauma 40. Most of the serotonergic, noradrenergic and dopaminergic neurons are located in midbrain and brainstem nuclei and project to large areas of the entire brain. This anatomy suggests that monoaminergic systems are involved in the regulation of a broad range of brain functions, including mood, attention, reward processing, sleep, appetite, and cognition. Almost every compound that inhibits monoamine reuptake, leading to an increased concentration of monoamines in the synaptic cleft, has been proven to be a clinically effective antidepressant 19. Inhibiting the enzyme monoamine oxidase, which induces an increased availability of monoamines in presynaptic neurons, also has antidepressant effects. These observations led to the pharmacologically most relevant theory of depression, referred to as the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis. The monoamine-deficiency theory posits that the underlying pathophysiological basis of depression is a depletion of the neurotransmitters serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine in the central nervous system. Serotonin is the most extensively studied neurotransmitter in depression. The most direct evidence for an abnormally reduced function of central serotonergic system comes from studies using tryptophan depletion, which reduces central serotonin synthesis. Such a reduction leads to the development of depressive symptoms in subjects at increased risk of depression (subjects with MDD in full remission, healthy subjects with a family history of depression) 41,42, possibly mediated by increased brain metabolism in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex and subcortical brain regions 42. Experimentally reduced central serotonin has been associated with mood congruent memory bias, altered reward-related behaviors, and disruption of inhibitory affective processing 16, all of which add to the clinical plausibility of the serotonin deficiency hypothesis. There is also evidence for abnormalities of serotonin receptors in depression, with the most solid evidence pointing to the serotonin-1A receptor, which regulates serotonin function. Decreased availability of this receptor has been found in multiple brain areas of patients with MDD 43, although this abnormality is not highly specific for MDD and has been found in patients with panic disorder 44 and temporal lobe epilepsy 45, possibly contributing to the considerable comorbidity among these conditions. However, there is no explanation for the mechanism of serotonin loss in depressed patients, and studies of serotonin metabolites in plasma, urine and cerebrospinal fluid, as well as post-mortem research on the serotonergic system in depression, have yielded inconsistent results. There is preliminary evidence that an increased availability of the brain monoamine oxidase, which metabolizes serotonin, may cause serotonin deficiency 46. In addition, loss-of-function mutations in the gene coding for the brain-specific enzyme tryptophan hydroxylase-2 may explain the loss of serotonin production as a rare risk factor for depression 47. Dysfunction of the central noradrenergic system has been hypothesized to play a role in the pathophysiology of MDD, based upon evidence of decreased norepinephrine metabolism, increased activity of tyrosine hydroxylase, and decreased density of norepinephrine transporter in the locus coeruleus in depressed patients 48. In addition, decreased neuronal counts in the locus coeruleus, increased alpha-2 adrenergic receptor density, and decreased alpha-1 adrenergic receptor density have been found in the brains of depressed suicide victims post-mortem 49. Since there is no method to selectively deplete central norepinephrine and no imaging tool to study the central norepinephrine system, solid evidence for abnormalities of this system in depression is lacking. While the classical theories of the neurobiology of depression mainly focused on serotonin and norepinephrine, there is increasing interest in the role of dopamine 50. Dopamine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., nomifensine) and dopamine receptor agonists (e.g., pramipexole) had antidepressant effects in placebo-controlled studies of MDD 51. In the cerebrospinal fluid and jugular vein plasma, levels of dopamine metabolites were consistently reduced in depression, suggesting decreased dopamine turnover 52. Striatal dopamine transporter binding and dopamine uptake were reduced in MDD, consistent with a reduction in dopamine neurotransmission 53. Degeneration of dopamine projections to the striatum in Parkinson's disease was associated with a major depressive syndrome in about one half of cases, which usually preceded the appearance of motor signs 54. Experimentally reduced dopaminergic transmission into the accumbens has been associated with anhedonic symptoms and performance deficits on a reward processing task in subjects at increased risk of depression 55,56. These findings are consistent with the clinical observation that depressed patients have a blunted reaction to positive reinforcers and an abnormal response to negative feedback 57. Almost all established antidepressants target the monoamine systems 58. However, full and partial resistance to these drugs and their delayed onset of action suggest that dysfunctions of monoaminergic neurotransmitter systems found in MDD represent the downstream effects of other, more primary abnormalities. Despite this limitation, the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis has proved to be the most clinically relevant neurobiological theory of depression. New findings on the role of dopamine in depression emphasize the scientific potential of this theory, and promising reports of antidepressant effects of drugs that modulate the dopaminergic system (e.g., pramipexole, modafinil) in difficult-to-treat depression underline its clinical relevance 51,59. Although many historical attempts to localize mental functions have failed, they have considerably contributed to a modern neuroscientific understanding of mental disorders 60. The development of neuroimaging techniques has opened up the potential to investigate structural and functional abnormalities in living depressed patients. Unfortunately, the diversity of imaging techniques used, the relatively small and heterogeneous study samples studied, and the limited overlap of results across imaging paradigms 61 make it difficult to reliably identify neuronal regions or networks with consistently abnormal structure or function in MDD. Functional imaging studies have provided the most limited overlap of findings. This may be due to methodological limitations and/or the complexity of neurocircuitry involved in MDD. A recent meta-analytic study found the best evidence for abnormal brain activity in MDD in lateral frontal and temporal cortices, insula, and cerebellum. In these brain regions activity was decreased at rest, they showed a relative lack of activation during induction of negative emotions, and an increase in activity following treatment with serotonin reuptake inhibitors. Opposite changes may exist in ventromedial frontal areas, striatum and possibly other subcortical brain regions 61. More solid evidence has been provided by structural imaging and post-mortem studies. A recent meta-analytic study on brain volume abnormalities in MDD revealed relatively large volume reductions in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex, particularly in the left anterior cingulate and in the orbitofrontal cortex. Moderate volume reductions were found in the lateral prefrontal cortex, hippocampus and striatum 62. Post-mortem studies consistently identified a reduction in glia cell density in dorsal, orbital and subgenual prefrontal cortices, as well as in the amygdala 63,64. Overall, functional, structural and post-mortem studies suggest that structural and functional abnormalities in the left subgenual cingulate cortex are the most solid neuroanatomical finding in MDD. Volume reduction in this region was found early in illness and in young adults at high familial risk for MDD 65, suggesting a primary neurobiological abnormality associated with the etiology of the illness. Humans with lesions that include the subgenual prefrontal cortex showed abnormal autonomic responses to social stimuli 66, and rats with left-sided lesions in this region had increased sympathetic arousal and corticosterone responses to restraint stress 67. Most importantly, chronic deep brain stimulation to reduce the potentially elevated activity in the subgenual cingulated cortex produced clinical benefits in patients with treatment-resistant depression 68. In summary, despite the considerable heterogeneity of findings from neuroimaging studies, there is convergent evidence for the presence of abnormalities in the subgenual prefrontal cortex in some patients with MDD. Neuroanatomical research in depression is of great clinical interest, since novel antidepressant treatments such as deep brain stimulation can target specific brain regions. In addition, there are promising leads for neuroimaging findings to predict the likelihood of responses to specific treatments 69. Risk factors for depressive episodes change during the course of the illness. The first depressive episode is usually “reactive”, i.e., triggered by important psychosocial stressors, while subsequent episodes become increasingly “endogenous”, i.e., triggered by minor stressors or occurring spontaneously 70. There is consistent evidence that the volume loss of the hippocampus and other brain regions is related to the duration of depression 71, suggesting that untreated depression leads to hippocampal volume loss, possibly resulting in increased stress sensitivity 72 and increased risk of recurrence 73. Glucocorticoid neurotoxicity, glutamatergic toxicity, decreased neurotrophic factors, and decreased neurogenesis have been proposed as possible mechanisms explaining brain volume loss in depression. There is no solid evidence on of these since there are no imaging to directly and neurotrophic processes in neurotrophic factor has considerable Specifically, studies have shown between and in hippocampal as well as expression of following antidepressant treatment The clinician should be aware of the potentially effect of depression and treat depressed patients as early and as A of studies consistently showed reductions in acid concentrations in the prefrontal and cortex in depression This may reflect stress since psychological stress to presynaptic of prefrontal neurotransmission low concentration may reflect reduction in the density and of In addition, chronic stress may reduce receptor possibly through changes in evidence of the hypothesis of depression the lack of effects of drugs on depressive symptoms and prefrontal concentration in subjects with MDD of evidence suggest a dysfunction of the neurotransmitter system in a of the receptor produced and large antidepressant effects in patients with treatment-resistant MDD inhibitors of release (e.g., antidepressant abnormal levels were found in depressed subjects as by and there is evidence for abnormal signaling in post-mortem Since is the major neurotransmitter involved in almost every brain the of the specific role of in depression (e.g., there are promising leads that the receptor is involved in MDD and are diagnostic for MDD, suggesting regulation in depressed patients. In addition, some depressive symptoms may show psychomotor of of positive and negative and a subgroup of patients with MDD may have a disorder In healthy young subjects, changes in the of the had specific effects on subsequent mood In depressed patients, of can have antidepressant on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of The and of the neurobiological of depression are in 1. The many theories of depression and the relatively low response rate of all antidepressant treatments a hypothesis of and suggest that depression is a clinically and heterogeneous disorder. This research on of the response to therapeutic interventions using such as neuroimaging and neuroendocrine tests in with for with to stress sensitivity and antidepressant The of of therapeutic will for the development of that has the potential to interventions and to up pathways in the of novel therapeutic approaches.

World Psychiatry · editorial or comment · 607 citationsread the source →

Atypical Antipsychotics: CATIE Study, Drug-Induced Movement Disorder and Resulting Iatrogenic Psychiatric-Like Symptoms, Supersensitivity Rebound Psychosis and Withdrawal Discontinuation Syndromes

Chronic illness can result in chronicity of clinical practice. As we have moved away from prescribing classical antipsychotics and tricyclic antidepressants, issues remain with the use of atypical antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants that need to be addressed, namely, iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and supersensitivity psychiatric symptoms. An optimal maintenance drug treatment consists of regular attempts to reduce the dose by finding a minimal therapeutic dose, regularly asking the question of when to reduce or withdraw treatment and for which patients, and moreover, why it is difficult to decrease a given drug treatment. Recently, Falloon [1] proposed that maintenance pharmacotherapy in schizophrenia will depend on finally finding minimally effective doses through ‘extensive training in stress management’. In the long-term treatment of major depression, Fava [2] has hypothesized that antidepressants can aggravate the course of depressive illness. Lambert [3] recently suggested that ‘antipsychotic-switching syndromes’, which include discontinuation syndromes, are a ‘major barrier’ to adjusting antipsychotic treatment. In this paper, we propose that to achieve optimal maintenance treatment with antipsychotics, and to reduce or withdraw antipsychotics effectively, we must distinguish syndromes associated with discontinuing antipsychotics, such as supersensitivity psychosis, from true relapse. While the prevalence and incidence of drug-induced movement disorder(s) (DIMD) has continuously decreased with atypical antipsychotics, DIMD persist as do psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD, and these must also be identified and evaluated. Persistent DIMD have been found to be a predictor of the later emergence of tardive dyskinesia (TD) and supersensitivity psychosis [4]. At present, we need to determine the relative risk of iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes, DIMD and DIMD psychiatric symptoms resulting from atypical antipsychotics. Although atypical antipsychotics are now most commonly prescribed, a debate has emerged on the differences between classical and atypical antipsychotics following the results of the Clinical Antipsychotic Trials of Intervention Effectiveness (CATIE) study [5]. The question that comes to the forefront is why recent studies are no longer finding well-established differences between these two generations in terms of efficacy and DIMD. Reasons to explain why recent schizophrenia studies have found reduced drug and placebo differences were examined at the International Society for CNS Clinical Trials and Methodology Annual Mid-Year Conference [6]. While the fact must be considered that patients included in recent studies have less severe illness with symptoms that are better controlled than in past studies (likely due to earlier treatment), the issue that psychiatric symptoms specific to schizophrenia are not being adequately measured nor differentiated from psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD is crucial to answering this question. For example, it is hard to believe that in a recent review of psychomotor slowing in schizophrenia, the authors, when evaluating its effect on measurement and treatment research to improve cognition in schizophrenia (MATRICS), nearly completely ignored the influence of akinesia and DIMD on neuropsychological tests in schizophrenia and the importance of accurate DIMD measurements [7]. As we pursue this ongoing discussion, we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic association with a high prevalence of DIMD and increases in basal ganglia volumes [8], and now address how to prescribe atypical antipsychotics most effectively, by taking into account DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes. The first widely prescribed atypical antipsychotic, risperidone, was first approved in Canada in 1993 following the publication of the Canadian Multicenter Risperidone Study, which reported clear advantages of risperidone over haloperidol and the placebo, and significantly less appearance of DIMD with risperidone than haloperidol [9]. DIMD includes the 4 types of movement disorders induced by antipsychotics: parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia [10]. These findings were confirmed by the American Risperidone Study [11] and several other studies reporting greater efficacy of risperidone over classical antipsychotics in terms of cost-efficiency [12] and the clinical management of patients with schizophrenia [13,14,15,16,17]. However, the CATIE study [5] challenged these results. The CATIE study found that of the 4 atypical antipsychotics studied, olanzapine was the only atypical to be more efficacious than the classical antipsychotic perphenazine, and to be highly superior to risperidone for discontinuation of treatment, due to lack of efficacy [5]. Olanzapine is known to produce less DIMD compared to risperidone, therefore one would expect psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD to be less frequent with olanzapine than risperidone. The expected higher rate of DIMD-induced emergent psychiatric symptoms associated with risperidone would explain the CATIE results, showing risperidone to be significantly less efficacious than olanzapine [5], despite risperidone being known to be at least as efficacious as olanzapine for true schizophrenic symptoms. Furthermore, the rating scales used to measure DIMD did not find the well-established differences between the 5 antipsychotics for DIMD rates [5]. Thus, we propose that DIMD and DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms were confounded with true schizophrenic symptoms in the CATIE study. DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms could be classified into 3 types: (1) emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as akinesia inducing depression, akathisia inducing anxiety; (2) iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as akinesia confounded with psychomotor retardation, akathisia with agitation; (3) supersensitivity psychosis symptoms associated with DIMD. In the CATIE study, quetiapine (mean dose = 543.4 mg/day), which shares a low rate of DIMD with olanzapine, was also found to be significantly less efficacious compared to olanzapine, but in contrast to risperidone, this lack of efficacy could be due to psychiatric symptoms related to supersensitivity psychosis explained by quetiapine’s loose binding properties at the D2 receptor [18]. Patients taking quetiapine had a completion rate of 18% out of 329 patients, whereas in our 3-year prospective study of quetiapine monotherapy with a lower mean dose of 487 mg/day (thus less likely to develop therapeutic tolerance), the completion rate was 21.7% out of 23 patients; 6 of 7 patients who relapsed, after a minimum 3 months of stabilized quetiapine treatment, met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. Without distinguishing these DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms from symptoms due to the original illness, the major impact of atypical antipsychotics is on the reduction of DIMD and TD [10, 20,] and their beneficial effects on psychosis are masked by DIMD emergent psychiatric symptoms, including supersensitivity psychosis. We will review 4 multicenter trials, which include a total of 14,497 patients, to illustrate how psychiatric and schizophrenic symptoms are confounded with DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms.TD epidemiology has changed significantly since the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, with a constant decline in its prevalence [10]. TD, classified as a DIMD, is a hyperkinetic, involuntary and purposeless movement disorder [10, 20]. Considered as the most significant side effect of classical antipsychotics, TD has been associated with antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics, and usually occurs after several years of treatment. Persistent TD can also occur after short-term exposure to classical antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics even at low doses and for as few as 2 months [8,21,22,23], while reversible and withdrawal dyskinesias share properties with levodopa-induced dyskinesia [24]. We conducted several epidemiological studies of TD [4,25,26,27] and in 1975, using the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) psychopharmacology criteria, we found a 31% prevalence of TD in 261 outpatients with schizophrenia [25]. We also evaluated these patients according to the Schooler and Kane research diagnostic criteria and found a 22% prevalence of TD. This variability of findings related to defining criteria complicates comparisons across studies [10]. In a 5-year follow-up study of 169 of the same patients [4, 25], 45% met the research diagnostic criteria for TD. In 1975, 131 of the 261 patients did not meet the research diagnostic for TD, and in 1980 treatment-emergent TD was found in 46 of the patients who did not have it in 1975, for a 5-year cumulative incidence rate of 35% and a mean annual incidence rate of 8.4%. When corrected for remissions, the mean annual incidence rate decreased to 2.9%. This incidence rate, which includes both patients who developed and remitted from TD over time, is similar to results found by other studies during the same time period [28, 29]. The cumulative incidence of treatment-emergent TD in the study by Kane et al. [29] was 12% after 4 years and 40% after 8 years of neuroleptic exposure, which is similar to our finding of an annual incidence rate (corrected for remissions) of 3% for classical antipsychotics. In a study carried out in 130 lithium-treated affective disorder patients previously, but less, exposed to antipsychotics, we found a TD prevalence of 9.2% [26], which was a quarter of the incidence reported in our previous studies on patients with schizophrenia who had greater exposure to antipsychotics. In this time period of classical antipsychotics, 2 meta-analyses (including mostly patients with schizophrenia) reported mean TD prevalences of 23% [30] and 20% [31]. In view of the fact that 58% of patients treated with classical antipsychotics will develop treatment-emergent TD after 10–15 years of treatment [4], and the known beneficial neuroprotective effects of atypical antipsychotics on TD [32] and on increased basal ganglia volumes induced by classical antipsychotics [8], we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic effects. In the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the following multicenter studies (n = 3,753) evaluated the incidence and prevalence of TD, using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale [20] and training videotapes as in the previous time period. In the first study, an annual TD incidence of 0.68% was reported prospectively in 725 patients with schizophrenia, treated with the long-acting injectable atypical antipsychotic risperidone [27, 33]. Treatment-emergent TD was found in 12 of 587 patients without dyskinesia at the baseline [33]; however, expert case assessment determined 7 cases (1.19%) of withdrawal dyskinesia (3 cases resolved, 4 cases unchanged), 1 case (0.17%) of reversible dyskinesia and 4 cases (0.68%) of persistent treatment-emergent TD. Of the patients with baseline dyskinesia, 28.4% improved, no longer met TD criteria and maintained this response [33]. This annual treatment-emergent TD incidence of 0.68% with atypical antipsychotics is only 22% of the annual incidence of 3% reported with classical antipsychotics [4]. In the second study, the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (67 centers in 11 countries) [34], 980 patients with schizophrenia, or schizoaffective disorders, taking an atypical alone (25.6%), a classical alone (31.5%) or both a classical and an atypical antipsychotic (42.9%) were included from March 19, 1998, to February 14, 1999, and TD was found at the baseline in 115 (12%) patients [27, 35]. Thus, after 10 years in the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the overall prevalence of TD decreased by at least twofold compared to our previous 1979–1988 studies with classical antipsychotics [4, 25], using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale and training videotapes. In the third study (baseline data from three Ris-Consta multicenter studies) [27, 36] carried out 1 year later, 2,048 patients were included from March 21, 1999, to December 15, 2000, and TD was found at the baseline in 209 patients (10.2%), using the same methodology. This study showed a further decrease in the prevalence of TD after an additional year of atypical use. This changing epidemiology of TD with atypical antipsychotics is confirmed by Correll et al. [37] in a systematic review of 1-year prospective studies with atypical antipsychotics, and by Jeste et al. [38] in a 1-year study of elderly patients treated with risperidone. In conclusion, following the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, the prevalence and incidence of TD have significantly decreased. However, the risk for TD still exists with both atypical and classical antipsychotics, and there is a need for continued surveillance of emerging cases of TD in patients taking antipsychotics [39], especially as the current debate continues on the differences in efficacy between these two generations of antipsychotics following results from studies such as the CATIE [5, 39]. Furthermore, Kane [39] has pointed out that newly trained clinicians using mostly atypical antipsychotics may not have had the same exposure to TD as previously trained clinicians.A high prevalence of all 4 types of DIMD (parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia) remains. In the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (n = 980), a prevalence of 57.5% of DIMD (n = 551 patients) was found [27, 35]. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048) [27, 36], 970 patients (47.4%) had DIMD at the baseline, which consisted of 778 patients with parkinsonism (38.0%), 285 patients with akathisia (14%) and 209 patients with TD (10.2%). Thus, nearly 1 patient out of 2 had a definite DIMD in this time period of classical and atypical antipsychotics. In addition, DIMD have been consistently associated with significant psychiatric symptoms as measured by the positive and negative syndrome scale (PANSS) [40, 41]. In the InterSept study (n = 980), which included patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who were at risk of suicide, suicidality was associated at baseline with DIMD, parkinsonism, TD and akathisia, and depression was associated with TD and akathisia [27, 35]. Based on these results, we recommend routinely assessing DIMD in patients with schizophrenia with suicidal and depressive symptoms. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048), baseline DIMD were also significantly associated with the PANSS total score, positive, negative and anxiety/depression symptoms [27, 36]. Greater anxiety and depression were seen in patients with severer DIMD, akathisia and parkinsonism. Higher PANSS negative symptom rating was associated with parkinsonism and higher PANSS total scores were associated with akathisia. In this time period, these last two studies (n = 3,028) show that DIMD persists with atypical antipsychotics, and that patients with DIMD have significantly higher PANSS scores compared to patients without DIMD.These results are in agreement with findings from 2 other multicenter studies: the American CATIE study [5] and the European Schizophrenia Outpatient Health Outcomes (SOHO) study [42]. In the CATIE baseline data, patients with TD (n = 212) were found to have significantly more psychopathology than patients without TD (n = 1,098) as measured by the PANSS total score and PANSS general psychopathology subscale [43]. In the 3-year prospective SOHO study, emergent cases of TD were associated with greater overall psychopathology. An increase in clinical global impression overall symptom severity was longitudinally associated with cases of TD in patients without TD at the baseline (n = The SOHO and the CATIE studies have also examined other for TD. the CATIE and SOHO studies found that other DIMD were associated with TD the CATIE study showed that patients with TD had more parkinsonism akathisia while the SOHO study found that baseline symptoms TD our findings in a prospective study of TD [4]. In to reporting that the incidence of TD was lower in patients taking atypical compared to classical antipsychotics after 6 months the SOHO study showed that the incidence of TD was associated with the incidence of of drug-induced in is crucial to that there is a of DIMD with atypical antipsychotics, which are not and confounded with psychiatric symptoms rating scales used routinely in clinical to DIMD do not DIMD from psychiatric symptoms from the 4 multicenter (n = 14,497 patients) into this the CATIE the [27, the Ris-Consta [27, 36] and the SOHO studies have all confirmed the association of DIMD with psychiatric symptoms. most of the studies included in this measure psychiatric symptoms according to the we propose the following of PANSS psychiatric symptoms associated with emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as depression and suicidality example, akinesia is known to produce depression, psychomotor and suicidal while akathisia psychomotor and suicidal and TD is also associated with suicidal iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding and DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as confounding and with and retardation, akathisia with anxiety and and and dyskinesias with and schizophrenic psychiatric schizophrenic symptoms associated with DIMD caused by supersensitivity psychosis, which we are now to first reported drug-induced associated with TD a in and increased receptor after long-term treatment with classical antipsychotics, and we this supersensitivity psychosis. We that TD and supersensitivity psychosis with the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic, given risk not and at the same The debate continues on how to most withdraw antipsychotic [1] and and psychiatric syndromes associated with types of syndromes have been with the discontinuation of (1) withdrawal syndromes and major (2) syndromes anxiety and which have been reported with and (3) supersensitivity syndromes such as TD and supersensitivity psychosis These discontinuation syndromes all produce psychiatric symptoms that can be confounded with true of the original illness. In a recent review of the on psychosis the importance of between antipsychotic withdrawal effects related to the course of the original illness and drug-induced effects such as supersensitivity psychosis. due to the discontinuation of a drug can be differentiated from the course of original illness and more long-term maintenance treatment could be reduced and in patients The long-term maintenance with second-generation antidepressants and of a major depressive disorder is of the in and during long-term maintenance treatment. The has also recently been to produce a persistent disorder following withdrawal to be related to supersensitivity When discontinuing antipsychotics and antidepressants, the of supersensitivity syndromes and other iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes must be to high doses or of outpatients and with schizophrenia treated with a classical antipsychotic treatment also included 1 but no antidepressants, no and no showed a prevalence of 22% for supersensitivity psychosis The prevalence of TD using Schooler and Kane criteria, was that found for supersensitivity psychosis. cases of supersensitivity psychosis increased the prevalence of supersensitivity psychosis to psychosis was associated with a higher maintenance dose of classical antipsychotics, high and schizophrenia with a The higher antipsychotic dose and higher associated with supersensitivity psychosis to the of supersensitivity and these results that lower doses of antipsychotics could the appearance of supersensitivity psychosis. In this study, there was no found between TD and supersensitivity psychosis, due to TD being associated with schizophrenia and supersensitivity psychosis with higher antipsychotic dose was not to be a risk for TD, whereas increased was associated with TD but not associated with supersensitivity psychosis. is that most patients in this study were treated with which has a high for the D2 which could to both a high incidence of supersensitivity psychosis and DIMD as the drug is known to produce a high incidence of symptoms psychosis, in its masked and withdrawal is known to occur 6 following the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic or 3 months for a long-acting injectable We have proposed that TD and supersensitivity psychosis can result from the of in the caused by following in D2 with high for The of supersensitivity psychosis and TD share can both occur after long-term use of antipsychotics and can and difficult to with of the antipsychotic stress both TD and supersensitivity psychosis and both can be by and by and TD was to be the predictor of supersensitivity psychosis in our and follow-up study of supersensitivity psychosis [4, TD and supersensitivity psychosis may or may not occur in the same time but TD is associated with supersensitivity psychosis when it occurs during withdrawal of antipsychotics These two supersensitivity syndromes have been difficult to study due to the fact that antipsychotics can their appearance further with supersensitivity psychosis is that symptoms the original illness and true however, supersensitivity psychosis can be as it more after of the antipsychotic than true occurs with high doses of antipsychotics and not with antipsychotic treatment and therapeutic to antipsychotic treatment after drug response time, as therapeutic there is further of supersensitivity and further syndromes, TD, can (1) or (2) persistent or (3) reversible or symptoms can persist for several months or years and can still be reversible or When persistent and supersensitivity symptoms symptoms, being severer than the original symptoms, but these supersensitivity symptoms persist in contrast to symptoms and may include symptoms atypical antipsychotics, it has been proposed that supersensitivity psychosis occurs more with antipsychotics with from the D2 receptor The 2 atypical antipsychotics most associated with supersensitivity psychosis are quetiapine and which both have loose binding properties at the D2 receptor An additional which and severe in the withdrawal of is its effect as an receptor Thus, for the withdrawal would be by the receptor following of at this drug in the of the a and psychosis results cases of supersensitivity psychosis have also been reported with olanzapine psychosis was found to be associated with quetiapine in our 3-year study of quetiapine in 23 outpatients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who had previously been treated with classical antipsychotics risperidone, and had symptoms and of side effects [19]. As in our of the CATIE study, 7 patients after a minimum of 3 months of stabilized treatment and 6 of these patients met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. the 11 of patients with baseline TD relapsed, the that TD to supersensitivity psychosis and have been to be efficacious in of patients with supersensitivity psychosis We also recommend the use of in supersensitivity and anxiety disorder induced by the discontinuation of the An can be used in with an antipsychotic or an in to more decrease or withdraw these and find the minimal therapeutic dose for patients who still need long-term treatment. a minimal therapeutic dose with an has an additional for a drug olanzapine, as the dose will significant side In in the of Mental Health psychiatric 35% of patients with a of schizophrenia and For severe cases of schizophrenia, the use of or is in to drug to antipsychotic While is less than or it is superior to for anxiety and the of optimal minimal maintenance drug treatment. proposed the beneficial results of treatment in schizophrenia is their effect We have also related their beneficial effects to an of a We recommend treatment as a first for from treatment, can also be prescribed as with as it has a In a and that and had than other in addition, emerging that may improve DIMD has also been to be effective as an to antipsychotic monotherapy in patients with schizophrenia who treatment We that of cases of schizophrenia can be related to supersensitivity psychosis. In patients for maintenance treatment is a minimal therapeutic dose can be with the use of an that will patients from antipsychotic or conclusion, DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms and supersensitivity syndromes will to to results such as found in the CATIE study which show that olanzapine is the only atypical antipsychotic more efficacious than a classical The proposed for psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD may to the of all classical antipsychotics and the use of higher doses and longer than of atypical antipsychotics. research is in to develop to distinguish between true and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and to to more withdraw antipsychotics and antidepressants by and supersensitivity syndromes, for the antipsychotics and quetiapine and for the may to further of DIMD, TD and supersensitivity psychosis as we to more differences in the of As most of antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants are not routinely or for more differences in drug will also to prescribe minimal therapeutic doses of antipsychotics and antidepressants for greater efficacy and better in the maintenance has and the last 3 years from and

Psychotherapy and Psychosomatics · editorial or comment · 168 citationsread the source →